JP6240872B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, there is an example of a gaming machine in which a display device capable of displaying a 3D display (stereoscopic image) with the naked eye is mounted and an effect by 3D display (stereoscopic image) is performed (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-028763

However, in recent years, the effects of gaming machines have become diversified and the control has become complicated.
In addition, control when a display device capable of displaying 3D display is mounted is more complicated.
Therefore, a gaming machine that does not cause a problem is required.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not cause a problem.

Invention of Claim 1 controls the production | presentation means which can produce 2D display and 3D display, and can produce production,
Switching operation means capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display;
Production operation means capable of being involved in a predetermined range in the production in the production means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The production control means includes
Comprising display state changing means for controlling the effect means to 2D display or 3D display;
The display state changing means includes
The display state of the effect means can be switched based on the operation of the switching operation means,
The production control means includes
After the switching operation means is operated, the first predetermined period is invalid operation of the switching operation unit, the first of the second predetermined time period different from the predetermined duration of operation of said staging operation means Invalid,
After the production operation means is operated, the operation of the switching operation means is invalidated for a third predetermined period, and the operation of the production operation means is not invalidated.
Here, the “production means” is, for example, a display device, but is not limited to the display device.

The invention according to claim 2 is characterized in that the effect control means includes:
After the switching operation means is operated, the operation of the switching operation means is invalidated for the first predetermined period ,
After the production operation means is operated, the operation of the switching operation means is invalidated for the third predetermined period ,
The first predetermined period is longer than the third predetermined period ;
Even in the third predetermined period, the operation of the effect operating means is not invalidated .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause a problem.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a block diagram of VDP in the production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an input process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows a command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect control command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows production control command output processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command data output process. It is a flowchart which shows payout command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart which shows a winning opening switch / error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows an error check process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a count switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation symbol start process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a stop symbol information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a latter half fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display middle process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2 (at the time-short end). It is a flowchart which shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows a process transition setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process transfer setting process during a normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a general electric power residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows an end process shift setting process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific information signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows CPU specific information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol determination frequency signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on reset process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an effect / switch button input process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a background preview edit process. It is a flowchart which shows notice information update determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows notice information update determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notice display data edit process. It is a figure explaining the 3D display system of a display apparatus. It is a figure which shows a notification operation | movement table. It is a figure explaining the memory information of a RAM area. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation control table of a notice effect. It is a figure explaining the data of image ROM. It is a figure which shows 2D effect control table 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows 3D effect control table 1. FIG. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation operation | movement which divided | segmented the display area of the display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement of the notice effect by special use of a parallax barrier. It is a timing chart which shows control of a decoration effect and a parallax barrier. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the shutter accessory mechanism at the time of switching of a parallax barrier. It is a timing chart of parallax barrier switching instruction control at the time of 3D display. It is a figure explaining 2D and 3D effect operation when the structure of an effect control table is made the same. It is a timing chart of valid / invalid control of a change button and a production button. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the production | presentation screen at the time of operation of a switch button and a production | presentation button. It is a timing chart which shows the operation | movement at the time of a power failure recovery. It is a figure which shows the structure of the modification 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification 3 of this invention.

Hereinafter, as a first embodiment of the present invention, a configuration example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 2 at a hinge portion 3 so that the machine frame 2 can be pivoted. And a front frame 4 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 22 (to be described later) of the game board 20 is visible from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be opened and closed.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to as a game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described.
An operation panel 6 is provided below the glass frame 5.
Normally, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (card type ball lending control unit) as a game medium lending device, but the illustration is omitted here. However, in FIG. 4, the CR unit is illustrated as a card unit 551, and the card unit connection board 54 that relays transmission of signals and the like to and from the card unit 551 is also illustrated in FIG. 4.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer). 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area where a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and a determination of whether it is out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won) is made. Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to an upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as a prize ball).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

Moreover, the upper plate 7 provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds a game ball before being discharged as a prize ball or a rental ball. The upper plate 7 is provided with a push button type effect button 9 operated by the player.
The effect button 9 can be involved in the effect of the display device 41 (see FIG. 4) within a certain range. For example, an image prompting the player to operate the button 9 is displayed on the display device 41 at the time of the notice effect Sometimes, it is operated by a player.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 that can move a game ball on the upper plate 7 by a player's operation, and a launch operation handle 11 that performs a launch operation of the game ball.
Further, in FIG. 1, reference numerals 12 a and 12 b denote speakers (sound reporting devices) that output sound effects and the like. Of these, reference numeral 12 a denotes upper speakers provided on both the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Reference numeral 12b denotes a lower speaker provided at the left end of the operation panel 6 (left side of the lower plate 10).

In FIG. 1, reference numeral 13 denotes a decorative lamp having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the front surface of the glass frame 5 as a light source, and reference numeral 14 denotes the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. It is a moving light provided on the front. Although not shown, the moving light 14 includes an LED as a light emission source and a motor as a drive source. Here, the decorative lamp 13 and the moving light 14 constitute a decorative LED 301 shown in FIG.
Further, if the decoration mechanism is divided based on the concept of a board and a frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light 14 correspond to the frame side effect mechanism, and constitute the frame decoration device 43 shown in FIG. The moving light 14 also constitutes a frame effect device 45 shown in FIG.
Furthermore, a switching button 15 that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display is provided in the vicinity of the upper plate 7 on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. The switch button 15 can be operated by the player, disables the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal (details will be described later), and performs the 2D display on the display device 41 (see FIG. 4), and enables the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal Thus, the display device 41 can be switched to a state where 3D display is possible. However, even if the display is switched to 3D display (meaning a mode capable of 3D display) by operating the switching button 15, the effect may be 2D display. In this case, the parallax barrier is in an invalid state.

B. 2 is a guide rail of the game board 20, and as described above, a game area 22 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front face of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 22 includes an out ball inlet 23, a center case 24, a first start winning opening 25, a second starting winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and a variable winning apparatus. 27, general winning openings 28 to 31, a normal start gate 32, a number of game nails (not shown), and the like are provided. A collective display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. The game nails flow down while hitting the game balls that have entered the upper part of the game area 22, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

The center case 24 is a member that surrounds the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 4) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown in the figure, the center case 24 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and electric accessories that enhance production effects in cooperation with production display on the display device 41 (for example, An accessory having a movable part that is operated by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid).
Note that lamps for effect or decoration are also provided in portions other than the center case 24 of the game board 20 (may be outside the game area 22). It should be noted that lamps for performance or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) correspond to the board-side effect mechanism, and the board decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 6) and the center case 24 The provided electric accessory corresponds to a board-side production mechanism, and constitutes a board production device 44 (shown in FIG. 6). It should be noted that the electric accessory constituting the board effect device 44 may be provided at a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is generally called a variable display device. In addition, as a name of the display device 41, for example, a special symbol display device, a special symbol display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, and an identification information variation display device are used as names of members having similar functions. There are various types, but those with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special figures. For example, special charts are displayed in three vertical columns on the left, center, and right, and special figures consisting of numbers, letters, etc. in each column are displayed in a stopped state (stop display), or in a fluctuating state (for example, vertically) Display in a scrolling state) (that is, a variable display).
In addition to the special figure, the display unit can display an image for presentation or information notification such as a background image or a character image, or an image corresponding to a so-called ordinary figure. Note that the special figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). .
In the present embodiment, the display device 41 is configured to be capable of 3D display in addition to 2D display. Here, 2D display refers to the same two-dimensional planar display as before, and 3D display refers to displaying a three-dimensional stereoscopic display on the display unit 41a of the display device 41 (the display unit 41a is also referred to as a screen as appropriate). To do. For 3D display, the display device 41 adopts a parallax barrier method, and enables 2D or 3D display by switching the parallax barrier between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal. The specific configuration and operation of 2D display and 3D display will be described in detail in the description of the operation of the embodiment.

The start winning ports 25 and 26 are winning ports that function as start winning ports for special drawings as will be described later. In this example, they are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 26 has opening / closing members 26a on both the left and right sides, and when these opening / closing members 26a are opened in a reverse C shape, a winning can be made. As shown in FIG. It is impossible to win if it is closed. The start winning ports 25 and 26 are disposed below the center portion of the center case 24.
The second start winning opening 26 is also called an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and corresponds to an ordinary variable winning device.
The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. This special winning opening 27a is opened on condition that a big hit, which will be described later, is made, and game balls can be won.

As described above, the display unit 41a (screen) of the display device 41 displays an image of a normal map in addition to the special image. The general game will be described as follows. Therefore, the display device 41 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32, the normal map variable display game by the variable display of the normal map on the display unit 41a or the like (an independent general map display device may be arranged separately from the display device 41). (Hereinafter, referred to as a normal map display game) is performed, and if the stopped general map is in a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.
When hitting the usual figure, a game is held in which the pair of opening and closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 are opened in a reverse C shape, and are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big game increases.
In addition, during the above-mentioned normal display variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general display start gate 32, the general display start memory is held on the display of the collective display device 35 to be described later. Are stored, and after the usual variable display game is completed, the usual variable display game is repeated based on the stored memory. In addition, if the probability of the usual figure is set to a high probability, it becomes easier to hit the ordinary figure.
In addition, the hold display of the common figure start memory displayed by the indicator of the collective display device 35 is the normal figure start memory. In addition to the collective display device 35, a unique general map start memory display for displaying the decorative general map start memory may be arranged in the game area 22. Here, the time reduction will be described as follows. Is something.
Abbreviation of time is an abbreviation of “time reduction”. After the big hit, the special figure and the usual figure change time is shortened more than usual, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased. The number of executions of a variable display game with a certain special figure by supporting the winning at the starting gate by opening the (second starting winning gate 26) (including extending the opening time of the electric train longer than usual) It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the number of balls (number of balls).

Next, the collective display device 35 displays a so-called ordinary figure display, special figure display, a special figure or general figure start-up memory hold display (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display, a general figure hold display), a game, Display of status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LED as a light source (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) Instrument). Note that the start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for informing the number of start memories that are held in a state in which the variable display game is not executed, and generally Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. That is, if there are three start memories, the three lamps are turned on or three figures are displayed.
Note that what is displayed by the display of the collective display device 35 is the special figure or the ordinary figure (formal special figure or ordinary figure), whereas the display unit of the above-described variable display device 41 or the like. The special map and the general map display to be performed are dummy displays for effects for the player. For this reason, when referring to the special figure and the ordinary figure as viewed from the player, this dummy display is pointed out. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, for example, “decorative drawing” is described.
Thus, the collective display device 35 is not intended for the player but is used for inspection of the game board 20 and the like. For example, the display of the special figure start memory for the player (special figure hold display) is performed by, for example, the display unit of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps (light emitting units) provided on the game board 20.

Next, the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 and the illumination unit in the game board 20 will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is provided with a display area peripheral illumination part 81 and a center case illumination part 82, and a front surface frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a board surface peripheral illumination part 83 and a frame illumination part 84. Is provided.
The display area peripheral illumination unit 81 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as a light source, and is disposed so as to surround the peripheral part of the display area of the display device 41.
The center case illumination unit 82 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and is disposed so as to largely surround the outside of the display device 41 disposed at the approximate center of the game board 20.
The board surface illumination unit 83 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as a light source, and is disposed below the game board 20 so as to surround a peripheral part along the guide rail 21.
The frame illumination unit 84 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and is arranged so as to surround the game board 20 in the front frame 4.
Among the illumination units 81 to 84, the frame illumination unit 84 has the largest area, and the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 has the smallest area. Further, as can be seen from FIG. 2, each of the illumination units 81 to 84 has an arrangement style that surrounds the display device 41 sequentially from the inside to the outside.
In other words, the lighting units 84, 83, 82, 81 are arranged so as to surround the display device 41 sequentially from the frame side (outside) to the inside of the pachinko machine 1. Is controlled in order from the frame side (outer side) to the inner side, so that it is possible to produce an effective presentation that easily attracts the player's attention to the display device 41 (details will be described later).
Note that the lighting and blinking control of each of the lighting units 81 to 84 will be described in detail later.
Each of these illumination units 81 to 84 corresponds to a plurality of illumination groups.

Of the illumination units 81 to 84, the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 that is closest to the display device 41 is configured to include a transparent dark red material. Transparent dark red materials may be included in lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, or transparent dark red materials should be included in the members for attaching the lamps themselves. Further, both of them may include a transparent dark red material.
When the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 includes a transparent dark red material, the contrast between the brightness when the lamps are turned on and the darkness when the lamps are turned off can be emphasized, and the conotrust can be increased.

C. Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
The main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 include a storage tank 51, a guide path 52a, a payout unit 53, a card unit connection board 54, an external information terminal board 55, a payout control device 200, a game control device 100, and an effect control device. 300, power supply device 500, and the like.

The storage tank 51 stores in advance the balls before being dispensed, and an insufficient number of balls in the storage tank 51 is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown). Balls are replenished from the equipment. The balls in the storage tank 51 are guided by the guide path 52a and discharged to the upper plate 7 by a payout unit (not shown) incorporating a payout motor 222 (shown in FIG. 4). Note that the payout unit can discharge, for example, a number of game balls corresponding to the amount of rotation of the payout motor 222, and the payout unit detects a payout ball detection switch 215 (see FIG. 4).
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when various information (including a unique ID) of the pachinko machine 1 is sent to the hall management device 140.

The unique ID is a concept representing individual identification information (main board unique ID) that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 and individual identification information (paid unique ID) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201, as will be described later. The reason why these are output to the outside of the gaming machine is to check the unique ID outside to determine the legitimacy of the gaming machine. The management device 140 corresponds to an external device of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), and has a function of externally determining the legitimacy of the pachinko machine 1 based on the unique ID.
Note that the external device having the function of determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine is not limited to the management apparatus 140, and for example, the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4) has a function of judging the legitimacy of the gaming machine. Also good. In this case, the unique ID of the pachinko machine 1 is sent from the external information terminal board 55 to the card unit 551.
In addition, the determination of the legitimacy of the gaming machine may be any of a form performed only by the management apparatus 140, a form performed by both the management apparatus 140 and the card unit 551, or a form performed only by the card unit 551.

Here, the above-mentioned unique ID corresponds to individual identification information that can individually (uniquely) identify an arithmetic processing device (game microcomputer 101 described later) in the game control device 100, but in the payout control device 200. In the arithmetic processing device (the payout microcomputer 201 described later), individual identification information that can individually (uniquely) identify the arithmetic processing device is also stored.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the individual identification information that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 is appropriately distinguished from the unique identification information, and the individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is appropriately distinguished from the payout unique ID as necessary. .
In addition, individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is referred to as payout individual identification information as a concept that distinguishes the individual identification information that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 from the individual identification information. The same applies to other examples described later.
It should be noted that without distinction, when simply referred to as a unique ID, it refers to a main board unique ID.
Further, in the inventive concept, the unique ID is referred to as “individual identification information”. However, in general cases such as a normal site level, the individual identification information is often referred to as a unique ID. In Example 1, the individual identification information is described as a unique ID, and the description and drawings may be described and illustrated as unique information or unique identification information in balance with the unique ID.

The payout control device 200 performs control necessary for paying out game balls (both prize ball payout and rental ball payout), and is configured by storing a circuit board that realizes this control function in a predetermined case. Yes. As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control device 200 performs a prize ball payout control for discharging a predetermined number of game balls to the upper plate 7 as prize balls based on a payout control command transmitted from the game control device 100. In addition, the payout control device 200 controls the payout for paying out the ball so that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to the upper plate 7 as a loan based on the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal from the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4).
The game control device 100 controls the solenoids and the like disposed on the game board 20 and sends control information (commands) to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game ( A substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer that performs these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case.

The production control device 300 controls the above-described variable display device, decoration lamp, production device, and speakers 12a and 12b based on the command transmitted from the game control device 100, and this control function is provided in a predetermined case. The circuit board to be realized is housed and configured.
The card unit connection board 54 (see FIG. 3 and also shown in FIG. 4) is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (card unit 551, the same applies hereinafter) side that lends a ball. is there. If the wiring connection is not made on the card unit connection board 54, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that it is impossible to launch a game ball.

  In general, when changing the model of a pachinko machine, replace the entire pachinko machine except the CR unit, or leave the pachinko machine frame side (including the payout control device) and the game board side (game board and game control). In some cases, only major control devices such as devices are exchanged. However, in the case of a rental ball of 4 yen, a 4-yen ball is used. For example, in the case of a 1-ball rental stand, the game board side and the frame side are exclusively for 1 yen rental. It is assumed that.

D. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it becomes difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (not shown).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device 400, and a power supply device 500 as main components of the control system.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
Of the signals indicated by the arrows in FIG. 4, “main ID” is a main board unique ID, “external information” is a gaming machine status signal, and “prize ball signal” is a prize ball from the payout controller. Ball number signal to be paid out, “discharge command” is a discharge command command from the game control device, “various signals” are payout abnormality status signals, chute ball switch signal, overflow switch signal, glass frame from the payout control device An open switch signal, a front frame open switch signal, and the like are shown.
Further, “external information” and “prize ball signal” are collectively referred to as “external / prize ball”.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal 102. Details of the gaming microcomputer 101 will be described later.
The gaming microcomputer 101 functions as a gaming arithmetic processing device (arithmetic processing device) and corresponds to the first arithmetic processing device of the present invention.
The inspection device connection terminal 102 includes, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the game microcomputer 101 to the inspection device is connected.

The game control device 100 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 4), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 4), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, Detection signals from the magnetic sensor switch 125, the vibration sensor switch 126, the glass frame open detection switch 211 (glass frame open detection SW), and the front frame open detection switch 212 (front frame open detection SW) are input.
Here, the first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting winning balls one by one for detecting the game balls won in the first start winning port 25, and the second start port switch 121 is the second start winning port. This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball, which detects one gaming ball that has won a prize 26.
The count switch 124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball that has won a big winning opening of the variable winning device 27. The prize winning port switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general prize winning openings 28 to 31, and when there are n general prize winning openings, one is provided for each and n is provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. The gate switch 122 is a sensor for detecting one game ball passing through the usual starting gate 32 one by one.
Each of the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, and 124 for detecting these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and outputs a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.

The magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126 are sensors that are provided on the back surface of the game board 20 or the like and detect fraud by magnetism or vibration.
Further, the glass frame open detection switch 211 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine is open. The front frame open detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
The game control device 100 is provided with a proximity I / F that processes signals from the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, and 126. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. To do.

Here, the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids 132 and 133 to be described later driven by the game control device 100 have a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 500. Supplied and enabled.
The power supply device 500 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 501, a backup power supply unit 502 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 101 in the event of a power failure, a power failure monitoring signal that has a power failure monitoring circuit and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal, a RAM clear switch 504 that initializes an internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 101, and the like are provided.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, You may comprise so that it may provide on a main board | substrate. Since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 500 or the main board in this way. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement when changing the model.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control apparatus 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the control signal generation unit 503 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, and changes the power failure monitoring signal (in this example, it is turned on). ) And a reset signal after a predetermined time. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

An initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504. The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on. Information stored in a RAM area such as a work RAM and a similar RAM area in the payout control apparatus 200 is initialized.
In this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101 and the payout microcomputer 201. The reset signal causes the entire control system to be reset.

Next, the game control device 100 includes a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a test firing test device 131 (connected during a test at a test engine), a general electric solenoid 132, a prize winning solenoid 133, and a collective display device 35. It is connected.
The game control device 100 manages the unique ID of the game control device 100 via the external information terminal board 55, specifically, individual identification information (main board unique ID) that can identify the game microcomputer 101 and external information as external devices. It is output to the device 140.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control device 100 with a cable, and relays when transmitting external information and the unique ID (main board unique ID) of the game control device 100 to the management device 140 as an external device. .
The management device 140 collects information (for example, external information) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in the amusement store, and performs processing such as calculation processing and tabulation display of information necessary for business.

Here, as the external information, for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 100 to the outside, a jackpot signal that informs the jackpot that occurs in the course of the game, a starting port that is a condition for rotating the symbol A start signal indicating the winning of a symbol, a symbol starting to rotate, or a symbol determining number signal notifying the symbol rotation when the symbol stops rotating, and the gaming state being in a state advantageous to the player (so-called probability variation state) , A privilege state signal indicating a short time state) and the like, and signals that are notified to the outside, and these are collectively referred to as a gaming machine state signal.
Since the privilege state signal is generated after the end of the big hit state, it is a signal output during the “big hit state + a state advantageous to the player” period.
Further, data (for example, a payout command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by parallel communication. On the other hand, a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball out switch signal, and an overflow switch signal are output from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, the test firing test apparatus 131 connected to the game control apparatus 100 will be described.
The test firing test apparatus 131 is used by an authorized organization to perform a test firing test of a gaming machine. The general electric solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the second start winning port 26, the large winning port solenoid 133 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the variable winning device 27, and the collective display device 35 is a so-called general purpose as described above. Display, special figure display, and also, special chart and usual chart start memory hold display and game state display.
Further, the game control device 100 is configured to transmit data (for example, an effect command) to the effect control device 300 through parallel communication.
Here, in the game control device 100, when a winning signal to the starting ports 25 and 26 is detected by the first starting port switch 120 and the second starting port switch 121, respectively, and a detection signal is input, the special figure starting winning number is 4. In addition to storing and holding in the range, a prefetch command relating to hold information is generated by extracting a random number based on the start winning hold and transmitted to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing. Further, when the start winning storage is suspended, a special figure suspension number command relating to the number of suspensions is generated and transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the same manner.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device
A start winning storage means for storing a start winning number based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening as a hold number within a predetermined range;
Pre-read command generating means for generating a pre-read command relating to stored information by extracting a random number based on the memory when the start winning memory is stored by the start winning storage means;
A hold number command generating means for generating a hold number command related to the hold number when the start winning memory is stored by the start winning storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising.
When the invention having the above-described configuration is realized, the game control apparatus 100 realizes the functions of the start winning storage means, the prefetch command generation means, and the pending number command generation means.

In the first embodiment, since there are two start ports (start ports 25 and 26), two types of special chart start memory (special figure start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). It is configured to execute two types of variation display games (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) as the special figure variation display game. The pre-read command and the hold number command are generated separately based on the winning of the game balls to the start ports 25 and 26, respectively. For example, pre-read hold information of special figure 1, pre-read hold information of special figure 2, hold number command of special figures 1 and 2, and the like are generated individually corresponding to each start port 25, 26.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
There are a number of start prize openings where game balls can be won,
The start winning storage means is
The number of start winnings based on the winning of each game ball to each of the plurality of starting winning openings is distinguished and stored as hold number 1 and hold number 2,
The prefetch command generating means includes
When the start prize storage means stores each start prize corresponding to each of the plurality of start prize openings, a prefetch command relating to stored information is generated separately for each start prize opening by extracting a random number based on the memory. ,
The hold number command generation means includes:
A game machine characterized in that when each start prize is stored by the start prize storage means, a hold number command relating to the hold number 1 and the hold number 2 is generated separately for each start prize port.

(Production control device related)
Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 and devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41, Although it has a sound source LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 analyzes the control command (8-bit data signal) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the contents of the effect and controls the content of the output video of the display device 41, or the sound source LSI. The reproduction sound is instructed and the speakers 12a and 12b are driven to produce sound effects, and the processing such as the drive control of the decoration LED 301 described above is executed. Further, when receiving the error notification instruction from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 outputs a signal to the error notification LED 302 to turn it on.
Here, in addition to a single command (for example, a stop command), the command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 does not start the presentation alone, and exhibits the effect in pairs. This is, for example, “variation pattern command + design designation command” at the start of special figure variation, and details of the type of command will be described later.

In addition to the above, main commands are described as probability information commands. This is prepared corresponding to the probability variation determination flag (see step S934 described later), and reflects the probability state at that time.
Note that even if the presentation control device 300 receives the probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100, for example, the screen of the display device 41 does not change immediately with the command alone, but an internal for producing the screen. Just change the parameters. Thereafter, when a command for changing the screen (fluctuating system, customer waiting demo command, etc.) is received, it is reflected as the probability state at that time.
Also, since it is determined that the probability of hitting the jackpot is low, even if the jackpot command is received without receiving the probability information command, the internal parameter may be forcibly rewritten with a low probability.
Examples of information that can be understood by the probability information command include the following.
・ "Low probability and short time (so-called 100 short and short time)"
・ "High probability and short time (so-called probability change)"
・ "Low probability and no short time"
Here, the “probability information” in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes not only “whether or not it is probable change” but also information “whether or not time is short”. There are four types of gaming machine states: “low probability / short time”, “low probability / short time”, “high probability / short time”, and “high probability / short time”. In the present embodiment, the above three types (excluding “high probability / no time reduction”) are used, and are transmitted from the game control device 100 at the timing when each state changes.
The command communication may be a parallel communication method or a serial communication method. In this embodiment, a parallel communication system is adopted as command communication.

(Discharge control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control apparatus 200 and devices connected to the payout control apparatus 200 will be described.
The payout control device 200 includes a payout microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a payout microcomputer) 201 for controlling payout of game balls (award ball payout or rental payout), an error number display 202, an error release switch 203, an inspection device. A connection terminal 204 is provided. Details of the payout microcomputer 201 will be described later.
The payout microcomputer 201 functions as a payout arithmetic processing device (arithmetic processing device), and corresponds to the second arithmetic processing device of the present invention.
The inspection device connection terminal 204 is configured to include, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information related to payout obtained from the payout microcomputer 201 to the inspection device is connected. When there is an error in the payout control process, the error number indicator 202 lights a specific number according to the content of the error. The error cancel switch 203 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated, for example, when the processing is stopped due to an error in the payout control process.

Devices connected to the input side of the payout control device 200 include an overflow switch 213, a radio wave detection sensor 214, a payout ball detection switch 215, and a chute ball break switch 216.
The overflow switch 213 is a switch for detecting that the number of game balls in the lower plate 10 is excessive, the radio wave detection sensor 214 is a sensor for detecting abnormal radio waves such as fraud, and the payout ball detection switch 215 is by a payout unit 53 (FIG. 3). A switch for detecting game balls (award balls or rental balls) to be paid out toward the upper plate 7 one by one, a chute ball cut switch 216 detects that there is no game ball on the chute for supplying the game balls to the storage tank 51. Switch.

Also, devices connected to the output side of the payout control device 200 include a payout motor 222, a card unit connection board 54, a firing control device 400, and an external information terminal board 55.
The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 of the payout unit 53 in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100, and performs control for paying out a prize ball. Also, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 based on a BRQ signal (lending request signal) or the like from the card unit (CR unit) 551 connected to the card unit connection board 54, and pays out a rental ball. Control to make it happen.
An operation panel board 552 is connected to the card unit connection board 54, and the operation panel board 552 is provided with a ball lending LED, a balance indicator, a ball lending switch, a return switch (all of which are provided in the pachinko machine 1). Etc.) are connected. The operation panel board 552 receives signals such as a ball lending LED and a balance indicator from the card unit (CR unit) 551, and sends operation signals from the ball lending switch and return switch to the card unit (CR unit) 551 for lending. Control necessary for paying out the ball is performed.
Although not shown, backup power is also supplied from the power supply device 500 to the RAM area of the payout control device 200 in the event of a power failure.

The payout control device 200 sends a prize ball signal (ball number information paid out as a prize ball) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 as an external device via the external information terminal board 55. At the same time, the unique ID of the payout control device 200, specifically, individual identification information (payout unique ID) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is output to the management device 140 via the external information terminal board 55.
When the card unit 551 determines the validity of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal board 55.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the payout control device 200 with a cable, and performs relay when transmitting the prize ball signal and the unique ID (payout unique ID) of the payout control device 200 to the management device 140 as an external device. .

  The launch control device 400 is supplied with necessary power from the payout control device 200 and receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device 400 controls the launch motor 401 that launches the game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and signals from the touch switch 402 and the launch stop switch 403 are input to the launch control device 400. The touch switch 402 detects whether or not the player is touching the launch operation handle 11, and the launch stop switch 403 temporarily stops the launch of the game ball and is operated by the player. It is.

Next, a detailed configuration of the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus that comprehensively controls games, corresponds to a main board (that is, a circuit formed on the main board), and specifically includes a circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control apparatus 100 includes a CPU unit 150 having a gaming microcomputer 101 (that is, a gaming microcomputer) 101, an input unit 151 having an input port, an output unit 152 having an output port, The data bus 153 connects the CPU unit 150, the input unit 151, and the output unit 152.

The CPU 150 includes a game microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC) and an inverter that logically inverts a signal (start winning detection signal) from a proximity I / F 163 described later and inputs it to the game microcomputer 101. An inverting circuit 112 and an oscillator such as a crystal resonator are included, and an oscillation circuit 113 that generates a clock serving as a reference for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit, and the like.
The gaming microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 101B, and a RAM (random access memory) 101C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 101B stores non-changeable information (program, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 101C stores the work area of the CPU 101A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

The CPU 101A executes a game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and drive signals for solenoids 72 and 73 and a collective display device 35 described later. Or the entire pachinko machine 1 is controlled.
Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 101 generates a jackpot determination random number for the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a hit determination random number for the common figure variation display game, etc. A random number generation circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 101A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for providing update timing of the random number generation circuit A clock generator.

Here, the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids 72 and 73 described later driven by the game control device 100 have a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, and DC 5 V generated by the power supply device 500. Supplied and enabled.
The power supply device 500 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 501, backup power supply unit 502 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of game microcomputer 101 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch to inform game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. However, since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 500 or the main board in this way. By providing it, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement when changing the model.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly, the built-in RAM 101C) of the game control apparatus 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the control signal generation unit 503 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, the control signal generation unit 503 changes (for example, turns on) the power failure monitoring signal as detecting the occurrence of power failure. At the same time, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) (see FIG. 4) is turned on, and is sent to the RAM 101C in the gaming microcomputer 101 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Forcibly initialize the stored information. In this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101. The reset signal causes the entire control system to be reset.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control apparatus 100 is provided with a first input port 161 and a second input port 162 as input ports. The input unit 151 includes a first start port switch 120, a second start port switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, a magnetic sensor switch 125, a vibration sensor switch 126, and a glass frame open detection switch 127. The detection signal from the front frame opening detection switch 128 is input.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts detection signals input from these switches 120 to 124 into positive logic signals of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 163 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wires of the proximity switches (the above switches 120 to 124) are improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, An abnormal state such as being disconnected and floating can be detected, and when such an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. In addition, in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above, the proximity I / F 163 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. ing.

Here, all the outputs of the proximity I / F 163 (excluding the abnormality detection signal) are supplied to the second input port 162 and read into the game microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153 and relayed from the game control device 100 as the main board. The test firing test apparatus 131 is supplied via the substrate 170.
Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, detection signals of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 162. It is configured as follows. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is assumed to receive a signal from a micro switch or the like, and is detected with negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  In addition, detection signals from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126 are also input to the second input port 162. The data held in the second input port 162 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE1 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 101 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 162. (Other ports can do the same). The enable signal of the first input port 161 is CE2.

  On the other hand, a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 211 and the front frame opening detection switch 212 and a signal from the dispensing control device 200 are input to the first input port 161. These signals are supplied from the first input port 161 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. The signals from the payout control device 200 include a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 (full).

  Further, the input section 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 164 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 500 to the gaming microcomputer 101 and the like. Reference numeral 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 500, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once input to the first input port 161 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 and each port of the output unit 152 (ports 171, 172, 175, which will be described later). 176, 177). Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 170 without passing through the output unit 152, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.
Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input ports 161 and 162 of the input unit 151. The data set to each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RST is input, each data of the input unit 151 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 101 is reset.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 uses the first port 171, the second port 172, the third port 175, the fourth port 176, and the fifth port 177 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. Prepare. Note that data is transmitted from the technique control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 through the ports 171 and 172 by parallel communication.
The first port 171 includes a 4-bit data signal to be output to the payout control device 200 (for example, a prize ball payout command or data), a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data signal, and a buffer A data strobe signal SSTB to be output to the effect control apparatus 300 via 173 is generated.
Second port 172 generates an 8-bit data signal to be output to effect control device 300.
The buffer 173 prevents the signal from being input to the game control apparatus 100 from the side of the effect control apparatus 300, that is, in order to secure one-way communication, the data strobe signal SSTB and the first output from the first port 171. This is a unidirectional buffer that outputs an 8-bit data signal from the 2-port 172. A similar buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first port 171 to the payout control device 200.

The third port 175 includes opening / closing data of a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 72 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 73 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 26a of the second start winning port 26. This is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 35 is connected.
The fourth port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 35.
The fifth port 177 is an output port for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4). Note that the information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or management device 140 installed in a game store. Further, the external information terminal board 55 has a built-in photo relay 55a through which the external information, the unique ID of the game control device 100 (main board unique ID), and the unique ID of the payout control device 200 ( The payout unique ID) is transmitted to the management device 140 as an external device. Note that since the photocoupler has polarity, it is necessary to pay attention to the connection. However, if the photorelay 55a is used as described above, there is an advantage that the polarity is unnecessary and it is convenient.
When the card unit 551 determines the validity of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal board 55.

  The output unit 152 is connected to the data bus 153 and outputs data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot, etc. via the relay board 170. The buffer 174 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 174 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. Note that the detection signal of the switch that does not need to be processed such as the start port SW output from the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay substrate 170 without passing through the buffer 174.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126 that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 153 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 174 and the relay board 170. The relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170, and the signal of the port that is selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  The output unit 152 includes a plurality of drive circuits (first driver 178a to fourth driver 178d). The first driver 178a receives the opening / closing data signals of the special prize opening solenoid 72 and the general power solenoid 73 output from the third port 175, and generates and outputs respective solenoid driving signals. The second driver 178 b outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 35 output from the third port 175. The third driver 178 c outputs an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 35 output from the fourth port 176. The fourth driver 178d outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth port 177 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

  The first driver 178a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 500 as a power supply voltage so that the solenoids 72 and 73 operating at 32V can be driven. The third driver 178c for driving the segment line is supplied with DC12V. Further, since the second driver 178b for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. The collective display device 35 has a third driver 178c that outputs 12V, a current is supplied to the anode terminal of the predetermined LED via the segment line, and a cathode terminal of the predetermined LED that is output by the second driver 178b that outputs the ground potential. As a result, current is drawn through the segment line, so that the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method, and the predetermined LED is turned on. The fourth driver 178d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a photocoupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 180. The photocoupler 179 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 101 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 180 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 161 and 162 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
In the present embodiment, the production control device 300 constitutes display state changing means, switching button effective display means, and production button effective display means.
Here, the display state changing unit has a function of switching the display state of the display device 41 (production unit) to 2D display or 3D display based on a predetermined switching command. The predetermined switching command is a main control of the production control device 300. The microcomputer 311 may output a switching command according to the progress of the game (for example, corresponding to the display mode of the notice operation table 1A), or may output a switching command according to the operation of the switching button 15 May be.
The switching button valid display means has a function of causing the display device 41 to display that the operation of the switching button 15 is valid.
The effect button effective display means has a function of causing the display device 41 to display that the operation of the effect button 9 is effective.
The effect control device 300 is a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) in the same manner as the game microcomputer 101, and image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 1st CPU 311. VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above and a sound source LSI 313 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 12a and 12b.
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1stCPU 311 is provided, and two CPUs are provided. In addition, a configuration in which image processing for video display on the display device 41 is performed in accordance with the data, but in this embodiment, only the 1st CPU 311 with high performance is provided, which is advantageous in terms of arrangement space and cost.
A configuration in which two main control microcomputers (1st CPU) and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU may be employed.

The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 is connected to a PROM (programmable read only memory) 321 storing a program executed by the CPU and an RTC (real time clock) 325 and a VDP 312.
The RTC 325 is a clock element that clocks time, and can be adjusted to the actual time by setting. The clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses a signal from the RTC 325, for example, Production control related to time, such as event announcements and special productions at amusement stores, is possible.
On the other hand, an image ROM 322 storing character images and video data is connected to the VDP 312, and an audio ROM 323 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 313. The image ROM 322 stores a plurality of moving images (movies) as video data.
The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the control command (8-bit data signal output from the second port 172) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control apparatus 100, determines the contents of the effect, and determines the contents of the display device 41. The contents of the output video are instructed, the reproduction sound is instructed to the sound source LSI 313, and the above-described processes such as the drive control of the decoration devices 42 and 43 and the rendering devices 44 and 45 are executed.
Of the illumination units 81 to 84 described above, the frame illumination unit 84 corresponds to an effect mechanism on the frame side and is included in the frame decoration device 43. The panel surface outer periphery illumination unit 83, the center case illumination unit 82, and the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 correspond to an effect mechanism on the panel side and are included in the panel decoration device 42.

For example, when a variation display game is executed, a command (for example, a variation pattern command to be described later) including stop combination (result mode) data and reach system (or variation time) data from the game control device 100. Is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the main control microcomputer 311 that has received this selects the change mode that satisfies the stop mode and the change time, and displays the display device 41 via the VDP 312. It is configured to control a special figure variation display game in which a predetermined special figure is variably displayed and finally a specific symbol combination (result mode) is derived and displayed.
It should be noted that aspects such as special display variation display actually implemented by the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by a command from the game control device 100, but the conditions given by the above command In the range, the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 finally selects a mode by random number extraction or the like (a configuration in which a certain amount of discretion is given to select the mode also in the production control device 300). Yes.

Here, the RAM 311a that provides a work area for the main control microcomputer 311 is provided inside the chip. The RAM 311a that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.
Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 313 in a serial manner, and data between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 is obtained in a parallel manner. Are transmitted and received. In general, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission by transmitting and receiving data in parallel.
The VDP 312 includes an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 312a used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 312b, a signal conversion circuit 312c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) system, and the like are provided.

Here, the display device 41 is connected to the VDP 312 and also to the main control microcomputer 311. The display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display 701, a switch liquid crystal 702, and a backlight 703. The liquid crystal display 701 includes a large number of pixels (pixels) configured by combining light emitters of three primary colors of light, and displays an image necessary for a game such as a variable display game based on a signal from the VDP 312. The backlight 703 illuminates them from the back of the liquid crystal display 701 and the switch liquid crystal 702 (the rear side of the screen of the display device 41). The switch liquid crystal 702 has a parallax barrier 702B (see FIG. 101 to be described later). By electrically controlling the parallax barrier 702B, the screen of the liquid crystal display 701 is switched between a stereoscopic display state and a flat display state. Is possible.
The switch liquid crystal 702 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 and is controlled based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311.
In the case where a shutter accessory mechanism is arranged on the front side of the display device 41, for example, the shutter accessory mechanism is controlled to open and close the shutter based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. (Details will be described later).

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 20. In addition, the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT for notification is input. Also, between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 313, a call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged in order to transmit and receive commands and data by the handshake method.

In addition, the effect control device 300 has an interface chip (command I / F) that receives a command (8-bit data signal output from the second port 172) transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100. 331 is provided. Via this command I / F 331, control commands from the gaming microcomputer 101, such as decoration special figure hold number command, special figure type / design information command, variation pattern random number command, customer waiting demonstration command, variation pattern command, and The main control microcomputer 311 receives a fanfare command or the like.
Note that the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM 311a which is built in the main control microcomputer 311 and provides a work area as necessary.
In this case, the command is stored in an area such as a command storage area of the RAM 311a. Specifically, for example, when a variation pattern command and a symbol command to be paired are sequentially transmitted among the commands sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, these commands are command storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 311a. Are sequentially stored and read out from the command storage area when the set is established, and the main control microcomputer 311 executes the effect process. The command storage area may be divided into a first command storage area and a second command storage area.
In addition, when the variation pattern command sent first is received, the effect control device 300 sets the storage area related to the effect in the RAM 311a of the main control microcomputer 311 to a default value (for example, the symbol stopped state with the off symbol). Is to be done.
The “storage area related to the effect” is an area for setting a default value and is separate from the command storage area.

In addition, in order to receive or analyze a command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, the RAM 311a that is built in the main control microcomputer 311 and provides a work area has a received command buffer (hereinafter referred to as a command buffer). The analysis data storage area may be provided as appropriate.
The reception buffer stores reception commands in order, and a ring buffer type is used.
Here, the ring buffer is an area for temporarily storing data that is controlled so that a certain memory area looks like a ring-shaped memory area. By using such a ring buffer, Transmission processing and reception processing can be performed separately, and it is also effective for preventing data loss and avoiding traffic jams in command reception processing.
On the other hand, the analysis data storage area stores a predetermined number of commands stored in the reception buffer by copying, and uses a FIFO (First-in-First-out) format that performs first-in first-out processing. Has been.
Here, the FIFO is one of methods related to data storage and retrieval, and is a method of retrieving data first stored first (that is, first-in first-out).
The use of the FIFO has advantages that high-speed communication processing is possible and communication and data reading can be performed asynchronously.
The reception command buffer corresponds to reception buffer means, and the analysis data storage area corresponds to analysis data storage means.
Since the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 42, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the frame decoration device 43, and the panel. A board effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a motor and a solenoid of the effect device 44, and a frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling a motor (for example, a motor for operating the moving light 14) of the frame effect device 45 described above. Is provided. These control circuits 332 to 335 are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a light emission source other than the LED may be used as the light emission source of the panel decoration device 42 or the frame decoration device 43.
Note that, among the illumination units 81 to 84 described above, the frame illumination unit 84 corresponds to a frame-side effect mechanism and is included in the frame decoration device 43, and thus is driven and controlled by the frame decoration LED control circuit 333. On the other hand, the panel peripheral illumination unit 83, the center case illumination unit 82, and the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 correspond to a panel-side effect mechanism and are included in the panel decoration device 42, and thus are driven and controlled by the panel decoration LED control circuit 332. .

In the case where a shutter accessory mechanism is arranged on the front side of the display device 41, for example, the shutter accessory mechanism is controlled to open and close the shutter based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. However, the opening / closing drive of the shutter in that case is controlled by the board effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 that controls the drive of the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button SW46 built in the effect button 9 provided on the glass frame 5, an effect motor SW47 for detecting the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, 2D display, or 3D. Provided in the glass frame 5, an SW input circuit 336 that detects each on / off state of the switch button SW 48 built in the switch button 15 that can be switched to display and inputs a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 for main control. An amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 12a and an amplifier circuit 337b that drives the lower speaker 12b provided on the operation panel 6 are provided.

  The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, in order to drive a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving the LED and the speakers 12a and 12b, and direct current voltages thereof. It is configured so as to generate a voltage of NDC 24V that is used to turn on the power monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311, DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V is generated based on DC 5 V. The DC-DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312, the tone generator LSI 313, the control circuits 332 to 335, and the amplifier circuits 337 a and 337 b, and these are reset. To. In this embodiment, the general-purpose port of the main control microcomputer 311 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 312. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 can be improved.

  In the case of this example, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to the sub control board. As described above, the effect control device 300 (sub control board) that controls the display device 41 controls the speaker, the lamps, the movable part for decoration, and the like, which will be described later, constituting the game control device 100. The main board indirectly controls the movable part and the like by sending a control command to the sub-control board. For this reason, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same regardless of the model, and technically, the main board is modeled by installing a game program for each model in the microcomputer 101 for gaming machines. It can be shared even if the brand is different.

Next, the configuration of a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The VDP 312 includes a CPU I / F 601, a data transfer circuit 602, a CG bus I / F 603, a compressed data expansion circuit 604, a drawing circuit 605, a first VRAM 606, a second VRAM 607, and a display circuit 608. Necessary circuits are connected to each other via the H.611.
The VDP 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 via the CPU I / F 601 and is connected to the image ROM 322 via the CG bus I / F 603. The VDP 312 basically generates image data for each frame to be displayed on the display device 41 in accordance with an instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 and outputs the image data to the display circuit 608 and the display device 42. The first VRAM 606 is mainly used as a RAM for a frame buffer, specifically, for example, a RAM for a frame buffer or a Z buffer (in the case of three dimensions, the amount in the Z-axis direction). On the other hand, the second VRAM 607 is mainly used as a drawing material RAM for storing material data.

Data in the image ROM 322 is stored in the second VRAM 607 via the CG bus I / F 603. The compressed data is decompressed by the compressed data decompression circuit 604, stored in the second VRAM 607, and also stored in the first VRAM 606 as necessary.
The drawing circuit 605 mainly processes the drawing material stored in the second VRAM 607 (for example, processing of various effects, enlargement, reduction, etc.), and the display position and order (for example, from the back of the screen to the front). Display order, etc.), image data of one frame is created and stored in the first VRAM 606.

The display circuit 608 includes a scaler 608a and an LVDSI / F 608b.
Then, the display circuit 608 converts the image data of one frame stored in the first VRAM 606 to the LVDS specification signal level at the setting timing of the interless mode or the non-interlace mode, and outputs the RGB data to the display device 41. Note that the display area of the image data can be enlarged (for example, VGA → XGA) and displayed by the scaler 608a. For example, in the case of VGA, the image size is 640 × 480, and in the case of XGA, the image size is 1024 × 768.
The data transfer circuit 602 has data transfer functions such as between the main control microcomputer 311 and the first VRAM 606, between the main control microcomputer 311 and the drawing circuit 605, and between the CG bus I / F 603 and the first VRAM 606.

E. Outline of Game Next, an outline of a game performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this example and a flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), the customer is in a waiting state (during demonstration), and a command for instructing the display of the waiting screen for the customer is a buffer (for example, the same) 5 corresponds to the buffer 173 in FIG. 5), and is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41 a of the display device.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 22 through the guide rail 21 wins the special winning start winning opening 25 or 26 (that is, when there is a special winning start winning), the fluctuation display of the special figure Is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a display (so-called variable display) in which a special figure (including numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) fluctuates (for example, scrolls) on the display unit 41a. ) Is performed, and a special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure variation display game) is performed.

And if the stop result mode of this variable display game (the combination of special figures derived by the variable display) is a special result mode (for example, “3, 3, 3”, etc.), a privilege called a big hit is given. It is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start prize, and this extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to make a big hit is determined in advance, and the variable display game is started in response to this determination.
Further, in the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be a big hit and after the big hit game The game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode (after a special prize period to be described later). In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). In some cases, so-called time reduction (which shortens the variable display time for special drawings or the like to increase the frequency of the variable display game and make it easier to win) is also performed.

  When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is reached, a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed) is passed, and the jackpot of the variable prize winning device 27 is set for a predetermined time (for example, In the range not exceeding 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (a jackpot round) that is temporarily opened for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds. In this big hit state, a command for instructing display of a big hit screen for producing a big hit state or informing the player of the number of big hit rounds is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, and the display unit In 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

The period in which the jackpot is in effect (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) are the special prize period. It corresponds to.
In addition, as the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, a big hit of 15 rounds is usually the main big hit, but a configuration that generates a 16R big hit as a premier or other configurations may be used. Further, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as a so-called suddenness (a sudden probability change in which the big hit probability changes via a big hit with few balls).

In addition, when a game ball is further won in the start winning opening 25 or 26 during the above-described special figure variable display game or big hit, the special display start memory is displayed on the display unit 41a and the like, for example, four are displayed. After the change display game or the big hit state is finished, the special display change display game is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start memory.
In other words, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer wait state.

In this embodiment, for example, two types of special chart start memory (special map start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). A variation display game (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25 occurs, the display device 41 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished.
Further, when there is a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 26, the display device 41 plays the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2. When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41 after the above special figure fluctuation display game ends.
When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first in accordance with a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed) or two types of variable display games are alternately displayed. There may be a mode to be performed.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 32 during the game, a usual figure change display game (hereinafter, referred to as a usual figure change display game) is played by the display part 41a or the like. . And if this normal map change display game result (stopped general chart) is a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.
At this time, a game is held in which the pair of opening / closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 is temporarily held in an open state where the pair of opening / closing members 26a is opened in a reverse C-shape. This makes it easier for the game ball to start and win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big hit increases.
Further, during the above-mentioned variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general chart start gate 32, the collective display device 35 performs a hold display of the general chart start memory and stores, for example, up to four, After the usual variable display game is over, the usual variable display game is repeated based on the memory.

Next, the external output of the unique ID will be outlined. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the system is reset, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 (for example, stored in the HW parameter ROM) is read out. The serial communication format (or parallel communication format may be used) by the operation of the game program is relayed by the external information terminal board 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). . As a result, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 can be sent to the gaming store side.
The unique ID is transferred to the outside (in this case, the inspection apparatus connection terminal 102 in FIG. 4) in response to a request from the outside. Then, for example, by connecting the inspection device to the inspection device connection terminal 102, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 is read out by the inspection organization.
On the other hand, the payout unique ID (payout individual identification information) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 of the payout control device 200 is made into a serial communication format (or a parallel communication format) by the payout control device 200 by the operation of the payout program. Then, it is relayed by the external information terminal board 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). As a result, the payout unique ID stored in the payout microcomputer 201 can be sent to the game store side.

Next, the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 will be briefly described. When a variable display game is executed, the combination of stop symbols (result mode) from the game control device 100 and reach A command (for example, a variation pattern command to be described later) including system (or variation time) data is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 selects a variation mode that satisfies the stop mode and the variation time. Then, a special figure variable display game is controlled in which a predetermined special figure is displayed in a variable manner on the display device 41, and finally a specific symbol combination (result mode) is derived and displayed.
In this case, among the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is a command that does not start the effect alone and exerts an effect as a set. For example, the “variation pattern command + There is a “designation command”. In addition, there is a command (for example, a customer waiting command) that exerts an effect alone, and many commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 for the effect.

At this time, in the production control device 300, the main control microcomputer 311 selects a change mode that satisfies the stop mode and the change time, and finally displays a predetermined special figure on the display device 41 via the VDP 312. A special figure variation display game for deriving and displaying a specific symbol combination (result mode) is performed.
On the other hand, the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 703 is controlled based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311, and the screen of the liquid crystal display 701 in the display device 41 is displayed in 3D (stereoscopic display possible state) and 2D display (planar display). Switch to the state.
In the case of 2D display, the switch liquid crystal 702 controls the parallax barrier 702B to be invalid based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, and displays a 2D image, whereby the screen of the display device 42 is displayed. The effect is performed in 2D display. Further, in the case of 3D display, the switch liquid crystal 702 effectively controls the parallax barrier 702B based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, and 3D images (left eye image and right eye image). Is displayed on the screen of the display device 42 to produce an effect in 3D display.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a switching button 15 that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display, and an effect button 9 that can participate in the effect of the display device 41 within a certain range. When the effect of 41 is 2D display, when the switch button 15 is pressed, the effect state is immediately switched to 3D display, but the operation of the changeover switch 48 is treated as invalid during a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). At the same time, an effect button invalid period (for example, 0.5 seconds) for invalidating the operation of the effect button 9 is provided in conjunction with the operation timing of the switching button 15, and during this time, even if the effect button 9 is pressed, it is treated as invalid. Is called.
In this way, after the change button 15 is operated, the operation of the changeover switch 48 is disabled for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and the operation of the effect button 9 is also disabled for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production button 9 from being operated intentionally (for example, including malicious intentions) together with, for example, continuous hitting of the switching button 15 or operation of the switching button 15.

F. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, it is as follows when the concept of the main structure used for description of the following flowcharts is clarified.
As described above, the special display and the normal map are displayed on the collective display device 35. The special figure in the following description of the control processing means this special figure (this special figure), and will be described in detail on the basis of the above. Note that the special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 based on the command from the game control device 100 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41.
(A) Special figure display device In the following flow chart, the special figure refers to the “main special figure” displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is called "decorative drawing".
In this way, the device for displaying the special figure is the collective display device 35, but the names of the areas for displaying the special figure in the collective display device 35 include, for example, a special symbol display device and a special figure display device. In order to distinguish it from a general-purpose display device, it may be called a special symbol display device.
(B) General-purpose display device In the following flow chart, the general-purpose display refers to the “general-purpose map” displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, when referring to the direction of the dummy display for the player displayed on the display device 41, for example, it is referred to as “decorative map”.
In this way, the device for displaying the universal map is the collective display device 35, but the names of the areas for displaying the regular map in the collective display device 35 include, for example, a normal symbol display device and a universal map display device. In order to distinguish from a special figure display device, it may be called a normal symbol display device.
However, in this embodiment, the display device 41 does not display such a general-purpose display. In addition, you may provide the indicator which displays a common figure (here a decoration common figure) display. In describing a gaming machine, a device that displays a “decorative map” may be described if necessary.
(C) Fudenden A device corresponding to Fudenden is the second start winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (Fudenden).
However, there are cases where ordinary electric power is referred to as an ordinary variable winning device, and in the description of the flowchart, for example, an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 26) may be used.
In addition, for example, at the time of high probability or when the time is short, the start winning is supported by the opening / closing member 26a of the second start winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power). There is simply simply a public power support.
(D) Special figure storage In the following flowchart, in the case of special figure hold (sometimes simply referred to as “hold”), special figure storage, or special figure start-up storage, It points towards “Figure Memory”. In addition, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decoration special figure hold" or "decoration special figure storage".
The winning winning ports that function as the starting winning ports for the special figure are the starting winning ports 25 and 26.
(E) Universal map memory In the following flowchart, the general map hold, the universal map memory, or the general chart start memory indicates the “general map memory” displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, when referring to the direction of the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as “decoration map drawing hold” or “decoration map drawing storage”.
However, in the present embodiment, such a normal start memory display is not displayed on the display device 41. In addition, you may provide the indicator which performs the starting memory | storage (in this case, the decoration common memory) display. In the description of the gaming machine, if necessary, it may be described including a device that displays “decorative map memory”.
(F) Variable winning device The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. The variable winning device 27 is sometimes referred to as a special variable winning device in order to be distinguished from the normal variable winning device.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main process of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process starts based on the fact that the gaming microcomputer 101 is forcibly reset. That is, when a power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. When the power is restored from a power failure, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated after the reset signal is turned on and released. Further, when the worker wants to initialize the user work RAM or the like of the game control device 100, the power switch is turned on while turning on the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 500. There is a need.

When the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, first, a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process (step S2) for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. When this occurs, stack pointer setting processing (step S3) for setting the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved, and interrupt mode setting processing (step S4) for setting the interrupt processing mode are sequentially performed. .
Next, in step S5, the process is stopped for a predetermined delay time (for example, 4 msec) in order to wait for the program of the payout board (the payout control apparatus 200) to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends the command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, thereby avoiding the payout control device 200 from losing the command. be able to.

When the delay time elapses, access to the RWM (read / write memory) is permitted, and then an off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”: that is, a state in which there is no output) is output to all output ports. (Steps S6 and S7).
Here, in this embodiment, the RWM indicates the RAM 101C. However, the RWM is not limited to the RAM, and a read / write storage element such as an EEPROM may be used as the RWM.
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S7 is provided here just in case. .
Subsequently, in step S8, a serial port ((port preinstalled in the gaming microcomputer 101) is not used because parallel communication is performed with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 in this embodiment). Process to set to the state that does not.
Here, the serial port is not used because the serial port is used when the unique ID is output to the outside (for example, the management device 140). It is. In some cases, it may be necessary to perform serial communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300. In this case, the serial port is set to be used in step S8.

Next, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch in the power supply device 500 is turned on (step S9). This is to determine whether or not the initialization switch is turned on according to the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S25, and if not, the process proceeds to step S10.
Note that the process proceeds to step S25 when the initialization switch is turned on and the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. This is a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal, or a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S16 which will be described later. For this reason, when the processing proceeds to step S25, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access-prohibited area) in the RWM of the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed.

If the initialization switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S10 to check whether the value of the power outage inspection area 1 of the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data 1, and if the check result is not normal in step S11 If it judges, it will jump to Step S25. On the other hand, if the check result in step S11 is normal, it is checked in subsequent step S12 whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 2 of the RWM is normal. If the check result is not normal in step S13, the process jumps to step S25. If the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S14.
Thus, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are all normal, it is determined that the power failure has been restored, and the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, if the values of the power outage inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are abnormal (if they are not stored normally), the routine jumps to step S25 assuming that the power is normally turned on.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in step S25 described later. In these steps S10 and S12, since it is determined whether or not the power failure is restored by using the plurality of check data 1 and 2, the determination as to whether or not the power failure is restored is made with high reliability.

Next, in step S14, the RWM data checksum is calculated, and in step S15, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match) (step S16). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S25, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S17.
In step S17, all the power outage inspection areas are cleared, in step S18, the checksum area is cleared, and in step S19, areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. In this way, the process (initial value setting) for power failure recovery is executed.

Next, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S20). If it is determined that the probability is not high (step S20; NO), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.
If it is determined in step S20 that the probability is high (step S20; YES), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area in step S21, and the high probability provided in the collective display device 35 in step S22, for example. On data of the notification LED (not shown) is saved in the segment area. As a result, the treatment corresponding to the current high probability state is performed. For example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 35 is turned on to display the high probability state.
In step S23, a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the special figure game process number is transmitted. After step S23, the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S9, S11, S13, S16 to step S25, first, all work areas before the access prohibited area in the RWM used by the CPU are cleared (step S25), and then the contents in the RWM are cleared. All work areas after the access-prohibited area are cleared (step S26), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). Then, an output timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) of external information (security signal) relating to RWM clear is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S28). Further, a process for transmitting a power-on command (power-on command) to the effect control device 300 is performed (step S29).
When the power-on command is transmitted, the other control device receives this power-on command and performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device to the initial position in the case of the effect control device 300, for example. Then, the effect of notifying that the RWM has been cleared is started. After step S29, the process proceeds to step S24.

Now, if it progresses to step S24 from the above-mentioned step S23 or step S29, in step S24, CTC (Counter / Timer which generates a timer interruption signal and random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 101 (clock generator) Circuit) Starts the circuit.
The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 101. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113 and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S24, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 101A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Then, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) As an initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the hit of the usual figure, it is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31).
This random number generation circuit generates a part of each special figure or ordinary random number in hardware. However, the initial values of these random numbers are set in software by the processing in step S33 described later. The random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. ), It is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.
The random numbers related to the special figure include a big hit random number (random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit), a big hit symbol random number 1, 2 (random number for determining a big hit stop symbol), a fluctuation pattern random number (Lee's Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers (hard random numbers) targeted in steps S30 and S33 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, and jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

Next, an interrupt is permitted in step S32, and an initial value random number update process is performed in the next step S33. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the hard random number so that it is difficult to deliberately aim for a big hit or the like by timing the game ball. This is for breaking the regularity of random numbers by updating the values of various initial value random numbers.
Note that the initial value random number update process in step S33 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the initial value random number update process is not performed. If it is only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, thereby simplifying the main process. There is an advantage that
Next, in step S34, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, twice) is set, and in the next step S35, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In step S36, if it is not turned on, the process returns to step S33. During normal operation, steps S33 to S35 are repeated.

Then, when proceeding to step S36, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of times of the check. If the result is negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step S35.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S37. However, with the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and momentarily due to noise even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times in step S36. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

In step S37, interrupts are prohibited, and then all outputs are turned off in the next step S38 (off data is output to all output ports). Next, power failure information setting processing is executed in steps S39 and S40. To do. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 in step S39, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 in step S40.
After step S40, a checksum is calculated in the next step S41 when the RWM is turned off, and the checksum calculated in step S42 is saved in a predetermined checksum area.
Next, in step S43, access to the RWM is prohibited and then waiting (becomes a reset waiting state waiting for a reset signal from the control signal generation unit 503 described above).
In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutdown is calculated, so that whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up can be checked. This can be determined when the power is turned on again.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps S37 to S43 is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power failure.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (step S41) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of the RWM being used. Next, after setting “0” as the calculated value in step S53, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, in step S55, the calculation address is updated by “+1”, and in step S56, the number of repetitions is updated by “−1” to check whether the calculation is completed. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the decision result in the step S57 is NO, the process returns to the step S54 to repeat the routine. When the number of repetitions is equal to the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation has been completed, the process returns to YES from step S57, and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the RWM is powered off.

[Initial value random number update processing]
Next, the initial value random number update process (step S33) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the hit initial value random number (step S61), a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 (step S62), a jackpot symbol A process (step S63) of incrementing (update (+1)) the initial value random number 2 is sequentially performed.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number for determining the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 1 and is updated in the range of 0 to 200. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is an initial value random number of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 2 and is updated in the range of 0 to 200. is there. The “hit initial value random number” is a random number that becomes an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. is there. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuing to increment the random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S24 and S32 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.

In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S71, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary. In register saving, for example, register saving processing is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.
Next, input processing is executed in step S72. In this input process, the detection signals of the above-described sensors (start port switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, count switch 124, etc.) are read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.

Next, in step S73, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in each step to be described later to the corresponding output port is executed, and then in step S74, each set control device (effect control device 300, Processing for transmitting a signal (command) to the payout control device 200) (command transmission processing) is executed.
Thereafter, in steps S75 and S76, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed, respectively. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to special figures, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), variation pattern random numbers (random numbers for determining variation patterns including presence / absence of reach action), stop symbol random numbers ( Random numbers for determining outage stop symbols). Here, the update of the random number is executed by increasing the random number by, for example, “1”. Therefore, each time this timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number maintains at randomness.

  Note that there are three types of variation pattern random numbers in the present example: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. In addition, the variation pattern random number may directly determine all the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 300 determines a specific mode. For example, only the variation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the production control device 300 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

  Next, in step S77, winning prize switch monitoring processing and error monitoring processing are executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (start opening switches 120 and 121, winning opening switch 123, and count switch 124 in the special figure) set as described above, for example, the input flag of the count switch 124 is set. If so, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to pay out 15 prize balls is executed. In addition, the error monitoring process includes an undetected error of each of the above-described sensors, an excessive error of the winning ball discharge, an open state of the glass frame 5, and an illegal winning except when the large winning opening 27a and the public power supply 26 are not open. It is a process for monitoring.

Next, in step S78, special figure game processing is performed. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination (result form) of the special figure stop pattern, and the process of setting the change form of the special figure (Details will be described later).
Here, when the change start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the change display game is started, the change display game ends and the start display is stored and the change display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot ends, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 300 is set in accordance with the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step S79, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 or the like according to the state of the usual variable display game is performed.
Next, in step S80, segment LED editing processing is executed. This is the display of the special figure on the collective display device 35, such as the special figure decided in the special figure game process in step S78, the special figure decided in the common figure game process in step S79, and other information. This is a process for displaying on a display (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, a magnet fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signals from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126. For example, when the input flag of the magnetic sensor switch 125 is set, a magnetic error occurs. As a result, predetermined processing (such as transmission of an error notification command) is executed.

Next, in step S82, external information editing processing is executed. This is to edit data to be output from the game control apparatus 100 to the outside. This data is output data to the payout control device 200 and the external information terminal board 55 (including a unique ID in addition to a jackpot signal, a prize ball signal, etc.).
Thereafter, in order to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step S83, the saved register is restored in step S84, the interrupt is permitted in step S85, and the process is interrupted (return). )

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 161 is read (step S91). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step S92).
Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93). Thereafter, in step S94, a parameter for reading the state of the signal taken into the input port 2, that is, the second input port 162 is prepared, and then the process proceeds to the switch reading process (step S95). Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the switch reading process (step S95) in the above input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the input port designated by the parameter prepared in the previous step S94, that is, the second input port 162 is read (step S101). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S102). Subsequently, the read state of the input port 2 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S103). Then, it waits for a delay time (for example, 0.1 ms) until the second reading (step S104).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the second input port 162 is performed (step S105). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S106). Subsequently, the read state of the input port 2 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 2 (step S107). Then, a bit that has changed in the first and second readings, that is, a signal is detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S108). Specifically, among the read states of the input port 2, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is “1” and the different bit is “0” in the first and second times.

Next, the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 (the state of the input port 2) is calculated to obtain the present definite bit (step S109). Next, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the same bit is “0” and the different bit is “1” in the first and second states of the input port 2 that has been read (step S110). Next, the logical product of the unconfirmed bit pattern and the finalized state at the time of the previous interrupt is calculated and used as the previous retained bit (step S111). Thereafter, the current confirmed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved in the RWM as the current confirmed state (step S112). Also, an exclusive logical sum of the current state and the previous finalized state is taken and saved as a rising edge in the RWM, and the switch reading process is terminated (step S113).
When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. Also, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, the design of the electric circuit that extends the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are slowed down. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical channel.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt period by performing the switch read process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. It is possible to achieve both the increase and the ease of structural design and avoid the above problems.

[Output processing]
Next, output processing (step S73) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, all output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 5) for outputting the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 35 is first turned off (step S121). Subsequently, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 35 is updated (updated (+1) in the range of 0 to 3) (step S122), and corresponds to the value of the digit counter. LED digit line output data is loaded (step S123). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid / test terminal / digit data output port 175 (see FIG. 5) is synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the solenoid / test terminal / digit data output port 175 (step 175). S124).
Thereafter, the segment line output data is acquired from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S125), and the acquired segment output data is output to the segment output port 176 (step S126).

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 55 is loaded and synthesized, and output to the external information output port 177 (step S127). Next, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test terminal output port 1 provided on the relay board 170 (step S128). Thereafter, the test signal output data 4 to 6 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay board 170 (step S129).
Next, the test signal output data 7 to 8 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay board 170 (step S130). Also, the test signal output data 9 to 10 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay board 170 (step S131). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay board 170 (step S132). End the output process.

[Command transmission processing]
Next, the command transmission process (step S74) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The command transmission process includes an effect control command transmission process (step S141) for the effect control device 300 and a payout command transmission process (step S142) for the payout control device 200. Details of these will be described later.

[Direction control command transmission processing]
First, the effect control command transmission process (step S141) in the command transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the production control command transmission process, first, the value of the write counter that is “+1” when the transmission command is set to RWM is compared with the value of the read counter that is “+1” when the transmission command is read from the RWM. Then, it is checked whether the command is set (step S151). Specifically, if the value of the write counter and the value of the read counter are the same, it is determined that there is no setting command. If the value of the write counter does not match the value of the read counter, an unsent command Is set (step S152).

  If it is determined in step S152 that there is no setting command (step S152; NO), the effect control command transmission process is skipped, and a command is set in step S152 (step S152; YES). If it is determined, the read counter is updated (+1) in the next step S153. Then, the command is loaded from the command transmission area (MODE (upper byte)) corresponding to the value of the read counter (step S154). Then, the area containing the acquired command is reset (step S155). Further, the command is loaded from the command transmission area (ACTION (lower byte)) corresponding to the value of the read counter (step S156). Then, the area containing the acquired command is reset (step S157). Thereafter, the process proceeds to an effect control command output process (step S158).

[Direction control command output processing]
Next, the effect control command output process (step S158) in the effect control command transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect control command output process, first, an off time of the strobe signal indicating that the effect control command (MODE) is being output is prepared (step S161), and the command data output process (step S162) is executed. Thereafter, an effect control command (ACTION) is output (step S163), a strobe signal OFF time indicating that the effect control command (ACTION) is being output is prepared (step S164), and then a command data output process (step S165) is performed. Run.

[Command data output processing]
Next, command data output processing (steps S162 and S165) in the above-described effect control command output processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the command data output process, first, in order to prevent the state immediately before the port from being lost, the port state holding data of the output port 171 including the strobe signal of the effect control command output is loaded (step S171). Then, an effect control command is output to the output port 172 (step S172), and a signal excluding the strobe signal is held in the previous state to the output port 171, and the strobe signal in the off state (for example, low level indicating invalidity of data reading). Is output (that is, the strobe in the OFF state is output) (step S173). Then, in the next step S174, it is determined whether or not the time for turning off the strobe signal (off time: strobe OFF period) has ended. If it is determined that the off time has not ended (step S174; NO), the process returns to step S172 to repeat the above process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S174 that the off time has expired (step S174; YES), the process proceeds to step S175, where the strobe signal is turned on (for example, a high level indicating that data reading is valid) (ie, the strobe is set). Set ON time). Subsequently, an effect control command is output (step S176), and on the register holding the loaded data, the strobe signal of the output port 171 other than the strobe signal of the output port 171 is held in the previous state, and the strobe in the on state (high level). A signal is output (that is, the strobe in the ON state is output) (step S177).
Then, in the next step S178, it is determined whether or not the time for turning on the strobe signal (on time: strobe ON period) has ended. If it is determined that the on-time has not ended (step S178; NO), the process returns to step S176 and the above process is repeated. If it is determined in step S178 that the on-time has ended (step S178; YES), the process proceeds to step S179, and the signal excluding the strobe signal of the output port 171 is set to the previous state on the register holding the loaded data. The off-state strobe signal is set with the output held, and then the off-state strobe signal is output (off-state strobe output) (step S179), and the command data output processing is terminated.
The reason why the effect control command is output again in step S176 is to prevent the effect control command being output from being output after recovery from the power failure when a power failure occurs during the loop processing in steps S176 to S178. Because. It is also possible to avoid changing the command code due to noise. In addition, it is also possible to loop only each process in this step S174 and step S178.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S142) in the command transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area provided for each winning opening (step S181). If it is determined that there is no count number (step S182; NO), the process proceeds to step S183, where the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated, and the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas are checked. Whether or not has been completed is determined (step S184). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S184; YES), the command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S184 that all checks have not been completed (step S184; NO), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S182 that there is a count number (step S182; YES), the process proceeds to step S185, and the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1). Thereafter, a payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to a winning number counter area, that is, a winning opening is acquired (step S186). Then, an off time (strobe OFF time) of the strobe signal indicating whether data reading is valid or invalid (for example, a time for maintaining the low level) is set (step S187). In the next step S188, the payout command (negative logic data) acquired in step S186 and the strobe signal in the off state (low level) are output to the port 171 (see FIG. 5).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the OFF time set in step S187 has elapsed (step S189). If it has not elapsed (step S189; NO), the process returns to step S188, and if it has elapsed (step S189; YES). Then, the process proceeds to step S190. In step S190, the strobe signal is set to an on state (high level) and the remaining output time of negative logic data is set.
In the next step S191, the payout command (negative logic data) is continuously output and the on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to the port 171. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the remaining output time of the negative logic data set in step S190 has elapsed (step S192). If it has not elapsed (step S192; NO), the process returns to step S191, and if it has elapsed (step S192) In step S192; YES, the process proceeds to step S193.

  In step S193, the negative logic payout command data is inverted to generate positive logic payout command data. Then, the remaining ON time (high level time) of the strobe signal is set (step S194). In the next step S195, the payout command (positive logic data) generated in step S193 and the on-state (high level) strobe signal are output to the port 171. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the on-time set in step S194 has elapsed (step S196). If it has not elapsed (step S196; NO), the process returns to step S195, and if it has elapsed (step S196; YES). Then, the process proceeds to step S197.

  In step S197, the strobe signal is set to the off state (low level) and the remaining output time of the positive logic data is set. In the next step S198, the payout command (positive logic data) is continuously output, and the off-state (low level) strobe signal is output to the port 131. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the remaining output time of the positive logic data set in step S197 has elapsed (step S199). If it has not elapsed (step S199; NO), the process returns to step S198, and if it has elapsed (step S199) In step S199; YES), the process proceeds to step S200. In step S200, the payout command data of positive logic is saved in the port status holding data area of the RWM as port status holding data, and the command transmission process is terminated.

  As described above, by outputting negative logic payout command data and then outputting positive logic payout command data, the command receiving side reads and compares negative logic payout command data and positive logic payout command data. Thus, it can be determined whether or not a correct command has been received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted and compared with the positive logic payout command data received later. Can be received from the game control device 100 to receive an accurate command.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S75) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the jackpot symbol random number 1, the hit random number, and the jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process of FIG.
In the random number update processing 1, first, the value of the soft random number status register indicating the update state of the random number is read, and it is checked whether there is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting after one round of the random number (step S211). . Here, if there is no random number waiting for initial value setting, the random number update processing 1 is terminated (step S212; NO). On the other hand, when there is a random number waiting for initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S213 (step S212; YES).

  In step S213, it is checked whether the usual hit random number is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. Here, if not waiting for the initial value setting, the process jumps to step S217 (step S214; NO). On the other hand, when the usual hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S215 (step S214; YES). In step S215, the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value of the normal hit random number, and in step S216, the loaded initial value random number is set in the start value setting register corresponding to the next initial value. That is, the next initial value (per-initial value random number) of the normal hit random number is set in a register that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S217.

  In step S217, it is checked whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. Here, if not waiting for the initial value setting, the process jumps to step S221 (step S218; NO). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S219 (step S218; YES). In step S219, the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 1, and in step S220, the loaded jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is set in the start value setting register corresponding to the next initial value. To do. That is, the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 1 (the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1) is set in the register holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S221.

In step S221, it is checked whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. If the initial value setting is not awaited, the random number update processing 1 is terminated (step S222; NO).
On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S223 (step S222; YES). In step S223, the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 2, and in the subsequent step S224, the loaded jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is set in the start value setting register corresponding to the next initial value. To do. That is, the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 2 (the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2) is set in a register that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area). After step S224, the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S76) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.
In the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. The random number update process 2 in FIG. Target and update every time an interrupt occurs. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determination random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In the random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S233). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. The value of the register in which is set is read (step S234). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. After step S234, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number.
As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, it is checked whether or not the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S236). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S237; YES), the process proceeds to step S238, and the value remaining by masking the value of the R register with the mask value (hereinafter referred to as the masked value) is “1”. Is added value (higher order), and “0” is added value (lower order), and the process proceeds to step S240.
The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so that it is avoided.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is a lower byte of the 2-byte random number or a 1-byte random number (step S237; NO), the process branches to step S239 to set “0” as an added value (upper) and set the mask value to “1”. The added value is regarded as an added value (lower order) and the process proceeds to step S240.

In the next step S240, it is checked whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. If it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S242 (step S241; NO). On the other hand, when the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S243 (step S241; YES). In step S242, “0” is set as a random value (upper order), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the mask value is set as the value (lower order) of the random number area to be updated, and the process proceeds to step S244.
If the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the value (2 bytes) in the random number area updated in step S243 is set as a random value, and the process proceeds to step S244.

Next, in step S244, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in steps S238 and S239 to the random value is calculated to obtain a new random value, and whether or not this random value exceeds the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233. Determination is made (step S245).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value, the upper limit determination value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random number value (step S246), and then the process proceeds to step S247. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit determination value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random number value, and the process jumps to step S246 and proceeds to step S247.
In step S247, the lower order of the random number value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, the data is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the lower-order area of the 2-byte random number. Subsequently, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S248). If the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S249; YES), the higher rank of the random number value is higher in the random number area (2-byte random number (upper)) side. (Step S250). Here, the data is saved in the upper area of the 2-byte random number. After step S250, the random number update process 2 ends.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S249; NO), the process jumps to step S250, does not perform the process, and ends the random number update process 2.

In this way, the CPU 101A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. As the variation pattern, as will be described later, a variation pattern of “no reach”, “normal reach”, “special (SP) 1-A reach”, “special (SP) 1-B reach”, “special ( Fluctuation patterns (reach) in various reach states such as “SP) 2-A reach”, “Special (SP) 2-B reach”, “Special (SP) 3-A reach”, “Special (SP) 3-B reach”, etc. Variation mode).
Therefore, the CPU 101A determines the reach variation mode for determining the reach variation mode in the reach state among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 25 and the normal variation winning device 26. It serves as a random number update means for updating random numbers for use (variation pattern random numbers).

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S77) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch / error monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided in each of the various winning openings and for monitoring an error.

In the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, a fraud monitoring table of winning opening switches in the large winning opening is prepared (step S261). There is a count switch 124 as a prize opening switch in the big prize opening. Next, fraud & prize winning monitoring processing is performed (step S262). This is to monitor the winning of a regular game ball (such as at the time of a big hit) to the big winning opening 27a and to monitor the winning to an illegal big winning opening 27a other than the big win.
Next, a fraud monitoring table for the winning prize switch in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S263). There is a second start port switch 121 for detecting a winning to the second start winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power).
Next, a fraud & prize winning monitoring process is performed (step S264). This monitors the winning of a regular game ball in the second start winning opening 26 as a normal electric accessory (general power) and monitors the winning in the illegal second starting winning opening 26. Next, a prize monitoring table (for example, a list indicating switches that do not require fraud monitoring) of a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (step S265). As the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, for example, there are a first starting opening switch 120 and a winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31.
For a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, since a prize detection process is performed although fraud monitoring is not performed, a prize monitoring table is prepared for the process in step S265, and the number of prizes for which the prize number is updated in the next step. Counter update processing (step S266) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.

After the winning number counter updating process (step S266), an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time. Update (update “+1” in the range of 0 to 3) and prepare (step S267). Subsequently, the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S268).
There are the following types of errors for monitoring the gaming machine, which correspond to a shot ball break switch, an overflow switch, an error for monitoring an abnormality of the payout control device, etc. from the payout control device 200.
(B) When 0: Switch error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) When 1: Shoot ball break error (c) 2: Overflow error (d) 3: When payout abnormality error Next, the type of error check defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is performed (step S269). Thereafter, the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S270).
The types of error monitoring defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) When 0 or 2: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) When 1 and 3: Front frame open (game frame open)
Next, the error scanning counter for monitoring the opening of the front frame and the gaming frame is loaded, converted into the gaming machine error monitoring table 2, and prepared (step S271). Next, the type of error check defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is performed (step S272), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S262, step S264) in the winning prize switch / error monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning monitoring process is a process performed on the count switch 124 of the big winning opening or the second start opening switch 121 in the ordinary electric power. Here, in addition to the detection of the winning, illegal monitoring is performed. This is because the large winning opening (special variable winning device 27) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable winning device 26) are likely to be fraudulently forcibly opening the opening / closing member to insert the game ball and paying out the winning ball.
In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the target fraud monitoring period flag is checked (step S281), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S282). If it is not during the fraud monitoring period, the process jumps to step S296, and the processes after step S296 are performed.
On the other hand, if it is during the fraud monitoring period, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the prize monitor switch subject to error monitoring (the count switch 124 of the big prize slot or the second start port switch 121 in the ordinary power system) (step S283). Here, if it is determined that there is no input (step S284; NO), the process jumps to step S298, and if it is determined that there is an input (step S284; YES), the process proceeds to step S285, and the target illegal winning number is updated (+1) ( Add) and go to step S286.

In step S286, it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings after the addition exceeds the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, 5). The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is because it is not determined to be illegal when winning a prize or when noise occurs in the signal, that is, it is not illegal but is not easily determined as an error. If it is determined that the determination number has not been exceeded (step S287; NO), the process jumps to step S296, and if it is determined that the determination number has been exceeded (step S287; YES), the process proceeds to step S288.
In step S288, the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud occurrence determination number, and in step S289, an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area. (Step S290) Further, an illegal winning flag is set as an illegal flag (Step S291).

Next, the set fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S292). If they do not match (step S293; NO), the process proceeds to step S294, and the set fraud flag is set as the target fraud flag area. After saving (step S294), command setting processing is performed in step S295, and the fraud & prize winning monitoring processing is terminated.
Therefore, if fraud has occurred as described above, a fraud notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and fraud notification is made.
On the other hand, if YES in step S293, that is, if the set fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area, it can be determined that the state is the same as the state already taught to the production control device 300, step S294, The fraud & prize winning monitoring process ends without performing the process of step S295. This is because the command is transmitted only when the flag changes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S282 that fraud monitoring is not being performed and the process branches to step S296, or if it is determined in step S287 that the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step S287; NO) and the process branches to step S296, step S296 is performed. Then, a prize monitoring table of the prize opening switch subject to fraud monitoring (the count switch 124 of the big prize opening or the second start opening switch 121 in the ordinary electric train) is prepared. Then, after executing the process of updating the winning number counter, that is, the process S297 for counting the number of winnings as a target for discharging the winning ball, the target unauthorized winning notification timer has already timed up or (-1) timed up after updating Is checked (step S298), and the check result is determined in step S299.
If the target unauthorized prize notification timer has not expired or has expired after (-1) update, the determination in step S299 is NO, and the routine is repeated and the routine is repeated.

  If the target unauthorized prize notification timer has already timed up or has expired after (-1) update, the process proceeds to step S300, where it is determined whether it is the notification end timing (the notification end moment). If it is determined that the notification end timing is not reached (step S300; NO), the process jumps to step S302. If it is determined that the notification end timing is reached (step S300; YES), the process proceeds to step S301 to reset the target illegal winning number. The process proceeds to S302. In step S302, a target unauthorized winning cancellation command is prepared. In subsequent step S303, an unauthorized winning cancellation flag is set as an unauthorized flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S292, and thereafter, the processes in and after step S292 are executed. Accordingly, at this time, an unauthorized winning cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the unauthorized notification is canceled.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S266) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S297) in the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update process, first, the number of winning-port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning-monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning-port switch / error monitoring process (step S311). Next, it is checked whether or not there is a detection signal input (more accurately, a change in input) from the winning prize switch to be monitored (step S312). If it is determined that there is no input (S313; NO), the process jumps to step S318. If it is determined that there is an input (S313; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded in the next step S314.

Then, in step S315, the target winning number counter is updated (+1) to check whether it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S316; NO), the process proceeds to step S317 to save the updated value in the winning number counter area, and then proceeds to step S318.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S316 that a counter overflow has occurred (S316; YES), step S317 is skipped and the process jumps to step S318. The maximum storage number (for example, 255 for the 1-byte size and 65535 for the 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the winning number counter area provided, and if it exceeds that, the value returns to “0” and pays. You will lose information on the number of prize balls you should have. In order to avoid this, in step S315, the contents of the area are not updated suddenly, but the update is performed after confirming that (+1) is set to “0” outside the area.
In step S318, it is determined whether the monitoring process for all the switches has been completed. If the monitoring process has been completed (step S318; YES), the input number counter update process is terminated, and if not completed (step S318; (NO), it returns to step S312 and repeats the said process.

[Error check processing]
Next, an error check process (step S269, step S272) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time. Is acquired (step S321).
The information defined on the prepared gaming machine error monitoring table includes the following.
(A) Address of error monitoring table (there are as many errors as there are errors to be monitored)
(B) Data for determining the switch status (c) Error notification command (d) Error notification end command (e) Error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value (f) Error release monitoring timer comparison value (g) Switch status area address ( H) Address of error monitoring timer area (Re) Address of error flag area

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked (step S322), and it is determined whether the switch is on (step S323). If the switch is on (step S323; YES), there is a possibility that an error will occur, so the process proceeds to step S324, and an error occurrence flag is set as an error flag.
For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table, if the shooting ball is out, the shooting ball out switch 216 detects that there is no gaming ball in the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank 51. If it is turned on, step S323 becomes YES. If YES, an error occurrence flag is set in step S324.

Next, a target error notification command is prepared (step S325), and then a target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S326). Next, the value of the target switch state area is compared with the current switch state (step S327), and it is determined whether or not they match (step S328).
If the result of step S328 is NO (non-coincidence), it is determined that there is still no need for error handling, and the current switch state is saved in the switch state area in step S329, and then the target error monitoring timer is cleared ( Step S330).
On the other hand, if the determination result in step S328 is YES (match), the target error monitoring timer is updated (incremented) by “1” in step S334 in order to determine whether or not error handling is necessary. Check if the timer comparison value (reference value that determines that error handling is necessary) has been reached. If the monitoring timer comparison value has been reached, the error monitoring timer is updated (decremented) by "-1" in step S336, and the process proceeds to step S337, where the set error flag is compared with the value of the target error flag area.
Here, when it is determined in step S335 that the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the error occurrence or cancellation state has been determined. However, there may be a situation in which error occurrence is confirmed when an error has already occurred, or error cancellation is confirmed when no error is occurring. Therefore, after the process of step S336, step S337 is performed. Then, by comparing the set error flag with the value of the target error flag area, it is checked whether or not the currently determined error state is the same as the current error flag state.

  If the determination result in step S338 is YES (the error flag is the same), the error state has not changed, so it is determined that no action is required, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S338 is NO (if the error flag is not the same), it means that the error state has changed to a new error state, so that the process proceeds to step S339 and the set error flag is set in the target error flag area. Save and proceed to step S340. That is, the value of the target error flag area is changed to that of the error state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S340. In step S340, a command setting process is performed to set a command corresponding to the currently determined error state. As a result, a measure corresponding to the current error state is performed. For example, if the shot ball is out, an error display notifying the user is notified or the notification is canceled.

On the other hand, if the target switch acquired this time in step S323 is not turned on, there is no possibility that an error will occur, and conversely, there is a possibility that an error will be released. The process branches to step S331, and an error release flag is set as an error flag. Next, a target error notification end command is prepared (step S332), subsequently, a target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S333), the process proceeds to step S327, and the processes after step S327 are performed. Therefore, at this time, processing corresponding to error cancellation is performed.
In this way, if an error occurs, a corresponding error flag is set and a treatment command is set. If the error is resolved, the corresponding error flag is cleared and a resolution command is set. In particular, in this error check process, not only the occurrence of an error is monitored, but also the cancellation is monitored and the process is shared.
Note that such error check processing is the same for errors such as glass frame opening and front frame opening.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the special game process (step S78) in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure game process, the input of the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121 is monitored, the whole process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.
In the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring winning of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is performed in step S351.
In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 26 that forms the start winning port 25 and the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance.
In step S352, a count switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process for monitoring the count number of the count switch 124 provided in the special variable winning device 27.

Next, in step S353, it is checked whether the special figure game processing timer has already expired or whether the timer has expired after -1 update of the timer. If the timer has expired, the determination in the next step S354 is YES. Then, the process proceeds to step S355, and if the time is not up, the determination in step S354 is NO and the process jumps to step S366.
The special figure game process timer is a timer value that is set to a predetermined value in each process after branching by a process number described later (steps S359 to S365: corresponding to process number = 0 to process number = 6). Yes, this special figure game processing timer is set so that it is time to execute step S359 and subsequent steps when the time is up. As a result, when it is time to execute step S355 and subsequent steps when step S353 is executed, the determination result of step S354 becomes affirmative, and step S355 and subsequent steps (including steps S366 to S369) are executed. . And when step S353 is performed and it is not the timing which should perform step S355-S365, the determination result of step S354 becomes negative and it becomes the structure by which only step S366-S369 is performed.

In steps S355 to S357, a special figure game sequence branch table is set for branching by a process number to be described later, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired, and the return after the branch process ends. Save the address in the stack area.
Next, in step S358, the process branches according to the process number. That is, with process number 0, the process goes to step S359 (special figure normal process), process number 1 to step S360 (special figure changing process), process number 2 to step S361 (special figure display process), and process number 3. Go to step S362 (fanfare / interval processing), process number 4 to step S363 (big prize opening open process), process number 5 to step S364 (big prize opening remaining ball process), process number 6 to step S365 ( Proceed to jackpot end processing. The customer waiting state (during demonstration) is process number 0.

  Then, in step S359 (special figure normal processing), when the special figure holding number (the number of special figure starting memory that is put on hold because the special figure fluctuation display game is not executed) is zero and the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed. Then, a process for displaying the waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. Further, in the special figure routine process, a process for starting the next special figure change display game (special figure change start process) is performed. In this special figure fluctuation start process, the start memory of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is monitored, and if there is any special figure start memory, the corresponding fluctuation display (first or second fluctuation display) is started. Is set (the setting of the variation pattern command transmitted to the effect control device 300, etc.) is set, the process number is set to 1, and the process returns. If the special figure hold number is zero and the next special figure variation display game is not executed, the process returns as it is (the process number remains 0).

Further, in step S360 (processing during fluctuation of special figure), processing for variably displaying the special figure is performed until the fluctuation time set in the special figure fluctuation start processing has elapsed. And if the said fluctuation | variation time passes, after performing the process which transmits the command (symbol stop command) which stops the symbol of a special figure to the production | presentation control apparatus 300, it returns with the process number set to 2. If the set fluctuation time has not elapsed, the process returns as it is (the process number remains 1).
Further, in step S361 (special drawing display processing), processing for displaying the special chart fluctuation display result for a certain time (1 to 2 seconds) is performed. When the display for a certain period of time is completed, the process number is set to 3 if it is a big hit, and the process number is set to 0 if it is off. When the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns as it is (the process number remains 2).

In step S362 (fanfare / inter-interval processing), fanfare processing for outputting a fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 12a or the like is executed immediately after the big hit, and an interval for realizing display of an interval period or the like in the big hit interval period. The processing is executed, and the processing number is set to 4 at the timing when the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is started.
Step S363 (processing during opening of the big prize opening) is a process while the big prize opening 27a of the variable prize winning device 27 is being opened. When the grand prize opening is finished, the processing number is set to 5.

Further, in step S364 (big winning opening remaining ball processing), a process of waiting for a certain period of time is performed in order to reliably count the gaming balls that have entered the big winning opening 27a just before the end of the big winning opening. After the elapse, the processing number is set to 3 when the big hit round remains, and the processing number is set to 6 when the big hit round does not remain.
Further, in step S365 (big hit end process), after the big hit ends, a process for executing the special figure normal process S359 is performed, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, when one of the above processes corresponding to the process number is completed, the process proceeds to step S366, and a table for controlling display on the collective display device 35 of the special figure 1 (display of the special figure 1) is prepared. In the next step S367, the control process (symbol fluctuation control process) for the fluctuation display of this special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S368, where a table for controlling display on the collective display device 35 of FIG. 2 (display of the special figure 2) is prepared. In the next step S369, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Control processing (design variation control processing) is performed, and then the process returns.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step S351) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the start winning port 25 (first start port) (step S371), the special start port switch common process (step S372) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step S372 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step S377.

Next, it is checked whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variation winning device 26) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 26 is activated and the game ball is open. (Step S373) If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (Step S373; YES), the process proceeds to Step S376, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S373 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step S373; NO), is the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 26 equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5)? Is checked (step S374), and a process of determining whether or not the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (step S375) is performed.
The normally variable winning device 26 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value).

If it is determined in step S375 that the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step S375; NO), a table for setting information on hold by the normal variation winning device 26 (start port 2) is prepared (step S376) Then, the special start port switch common process (step S377) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
Further, when it is determined in step S375 that the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step S375; YES), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special start port switch common process (steps S372 and S377) in the start port switch monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the first start port switch 120 or the second start port switch 121.
In the special figure start port switch common process, first, of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120). If it is determined (step S381) and it is determined that there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step S382; NO), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S382 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step S383; YES), after saving the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch (step S383), The big hit random number extracted in the hard random number latch register is loaded (the big hit random number is extracted) (step S384).

Subsequently, information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120) of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is displayed outside the pachinko machine 1. The number of times to be output to the management device 140 (the number of times the start port signal is output) (the number of times that another output must be output) is loaded (step S385). Then, the loaded start port signal output count is updated (+1), it is checked whether the output count overflows (step S386), and if it is determined that the output count does not overflow (step S387; NO), the updated Is saved in the RWM start port signal output count area (step S388), and the process proceeds to step S389. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S387 that the output count overflows (step S387; YES), the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, among the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, the update target special figure holding corresponding to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120) is suspended ( It is checked whether or not the (starting memory) number is less than the upper limit value (step S389), and processing for determining whether or not the special figure holding number is less than the upper limit value (step S390) is performed.

If it is determined in step S390 that the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step S390; YES), a process of updating (+1) the special figure hold number to be updated (for example, the special figure 1 hold number) ( After performing step S391), a decoration special figure hold number command (MODE) of the target starter switch is prepared (step S392), and further, a special figure reservation number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is issued. Preparation is made (step S393), and command setting processing (step S394) is performed.
Next, a process of calculating the address of the random number save area corresponding to the special figure hold number (step S395) is performed. Subsequently, the big hit random number is saved in the random number saving area of the RWM (step S396), and then the big hit symbol random number of the start switch to be monitored is loaded (the big hit symbol random number is extracted) and prepared (step S397), The corresponding jackpot symbol random number is saved in the RWM jackpot symbol random number save area, and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the register (step S398).

Next, the corresponding variation pattern random number 1 is loaded (the variation pattern random number 1 is extracted), and the loaded value is saved in the variation pattern random number 1 saving area of the RWM (step S399). Load (extract the variation pattern random number 2), save the loaded value in the variation pattern random number 2 save area of the RWM (step S400), and then load the corresponding variation pattern random number 3 (extract the variation pattern random number 3) Then, the loaded value is saved in the RWM fluctuation pattern random number 3 save area (step S401).
Here, the RWM extracts various random numbers based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 25 and the normal variation winning apparatus 26, and a start storage means capable of storing the extracted various random numbers as start memories. Make.
Subsequently, a special figure hold information determination process (step S402) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S390 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (step S390; NO), is the input of the start port switch according to step S382 the input of the first start port switch 120? If it is checked (step S403) and it is determined that the input is the input of the first start port switch 120 (step S404; YES), a decoration special figure hold number command (hold overflow command) is prepared (step S405), A command setting process (step S406) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S404 that the input is not the first start port switch 120 (step S404; NO), the special view start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step S402) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure hold information determination process, first, in step S411, it is checked whether or not a condition for executing the prefetch effect is satisfied. The conditions for executing the pre-reading effect are as follows.
・ Special figure 1: Regular variation winning device 26 is being supported (supporting ordinary power) and not in big hit ・ Special figure 2: No condition When this condition is met, the result related information corresponding to the start memory A prefetch process for performing the determination is performed.
The check result in step S411 is determined in step S412, and if the condition for executing the prefetch effect is not satisfied, the routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S413 to perform a big hit determination process. The big hit determination process determines a big hit based on whether or not the random number extracted at the timing of the start winning prize is within the big hit range. When the big hit is determined, the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag area.

Next, in step S414, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination result is a big hit. If the big hit is determined, the process proceeds to step S415 to set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch, and in the subsequent step S416. Check the jackpot symbol random number and get and set the corresponding jackpot information table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S418.
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol random number check table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (represents distribution rate)
-Address of the jackpot information table corresponding to the judgment value The information defined on the jackpot information table includes the following.
・ Pattern information ・ Start opening prize design command

On the other hand, if the decision result in the step S414 is NO (not a big hit), the process branches to a step S417 to set a miss information table, and then the process proceeds to a step S418. In the loss information table, for example, a start opening prize design command is defined.
When the process proceeds from step S416 or step S417 to step S418, in step S418, symbol information is acquired from the set information table and saved in the symbol information (work) area. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S419, where a start opening winning effect symbol command is acquired from the set information table and saved in the winning effect symbol command area.
Next, of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, after preparing the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch (step S420), the target start port winning effect command setting table is prepared. Then (step S421), special figure information setting processing (step S422) for setting the special figure information set for the monitoring target start port is performed.
Subsequently, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step S423) for setting the second half variation pattern among the variation modes in the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern setting process (step S423) for setting the variation aspect of the special figure variation display game ( Step S424) is performed.
Each of the special figure information setting process in step S422, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step S423, and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S424 is a special figure information setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 (see FIG. 42). The latter half of the variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 43) and the variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 44) will be described in detail later.

Then, a start opening prize effect command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is calculated and prepared (step S425), and the second half variation number value is prepared as a start opening prize effect command (ACTION) (step S426). Command setting processing (step S427) is performed. Subsequently, the start opening winning effect command command is loaded and prepared from the winning effect symbol command area (step S428), the command setting process (step S429) is performed, and the special figure holding information determination process is terminated.
That is, the start opening prize effect command is prepared in steps S425 and S426, and the start opening prize effect symbol command is prepared in step S428, so that the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory is obtained. The effect control device 300 can be notified before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and in particular, the display mode of the special figure hold displayed on the display device 41 is changed. The result related information can be notified to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game.

[Count switch monitoring processing]
Next, the count switch monitoring process (step S352) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the count switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not the special prize winning unit 27 of the special variable prize winning device 27 is open (step S451), and it is determined that the special prize opening is open (step S452; YES). Then, it is checked whether or not there is an input from the count switch 124 (step S453). If it is determined that there is an input from the count switch 124 (step S454; YES), the numerical value of the big prize winning counter is updated (+1). Processing (step S455) is performed.

  Subsequently, it is checked whether or not the count number of the big prize counter has reached the upper limit (step S456), and if it is determined that the big prize count has reached the upper limit (step S457; YES), A process of clearing the figure game process timer to 0 (step S458) is performed, and the count switch monitoring process is terminated.

  Whether it is determined in step S452 that the special winning opening is not open (step S452; NO), or whether it is determined in step S454 that there is no input from the count switch 124 (step S454; NO). ) Alternatively, if it is determined in step S457 that the number of winning prizes has not reached the upper limit (step S457; NO), the count switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step S359) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the second special figure holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (step S461).
If it is determined that the second special figure hold number is 0 (step S462; YES), it is checked whether or not the first start memory number (first special figure hold number) is 0 (step S463).
If it is determined that the number of first special figure hold is 0 (step S464; YES), it is checked whether the customer waiting demo has already started (step S465), and the customer waiting demo has not started. That is, if it is determined that the process has not been started (step S466; NO), a process of saving the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area is performed (step S467).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step S468), and a command setting process (step S469) is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S465 that the customer waiting demo has already started (step S466; YES), the customer waiting demo flag is already saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S467), and the customer waiting demo command is also sent. Since preparation (step S468) and command setting processing (step S469) are also executed, the processing proceeds to step S470 without performing these processing.
Next, special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step S470). This sets various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, the processing number “0” relating to the special figure normal processing, the flag (large prize winning fraud monitoring information) for defining the special winning prize fraud monitoring period, and the like. Processing is performed, and then the special figure routine processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S462 that the second special figure reservation number is not 0 (step S463; NO), special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 1 (step S471) is performed. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in step S471 will be described later.
Then, a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is performed (step S470). This prepares a table (for the second special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process, information on the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, and the end of the customer waiting demo. , A test signal related to the fluctuation of the second special figure, information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35 (for example, the special figure 2 display For example, a flag related to the fluctuation of the indicator, the initial value of the timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 indicator), and the like. Thereafter, the special figure routine process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S464 that the first special figure hold number is not 0 (step S464; NO), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S473) is performed. Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 in step S473 will be described later.
Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is performed (step S474). This prepares a table (for the first special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process, or the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process in the table, the information related to the end of the customer waiting demonstration. , Test signals related to the fluctuation of the first special figure, information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display which is the LED segment in the collective display device 35 (for example, the special figure 1 display For example, a flag related to the fluctuation of the indicator, the initial value of the timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 indicator), and the like. Thereafter, the special figure routine process is terminated.
In this way, the second special figure reservation number in steps S461 and S462 is checked before the first special figure reservation number check in steps S463 and S464, so that the second special figure reservation number is zero. If not, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 (step S471) is executed.
That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S470) in the above special figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, “0” is set as the process number in step S481 (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure normal process is prepared and the process number “0” related to the special figure normal process is set in the table. "" Is set), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area in step S482.
Next, in step S483, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is reset, and in step S484, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area, and the routine is ended. As a result, various data for shifting to the special figure routine process, for example, the process number “0” relating to the special figure routine process is set, and a flag (big prize entrance fraud monitoring information) for specifying the big prize mouth fraud monitoring period is set. Processing to set is performed.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 (step S473) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, first, whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. The big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the big hit flag 1 is set (step S491). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process in step S491 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S492) relating to the setting of the first special figure stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol), the first special figure stop symbol number (special figure 1 stop symbol number) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S493). The test signal corresponding to the first special figure stop symbol number (special symbol 1 stop symbol number) includes a symbol 2 data signal, and this signal is continuously output until the data value changes. The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step S492 will be described later.
Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is saved in the symbol information (work) area (step S494).

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step S495), and the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step S496).
Subsequently, a table (for special figure 1) for setting information regarding the variation pattern is prepared (step S497), and special figure information setting processing (step S498) for setting special figure information is performed. Subsequently, among the variation modes in the first special figure variation display game, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step S499) for setting the second half variation pattern, the variation for setting the variation aspect of the first special figure variation display game. Pattern setting processing (step S500) is performed. Then, the fluctuation start information setting process (step S501) for setting the fluctuation start information of the first special figure is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.
Details of the special figure information setting process in step S498, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step S499, the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S500, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in step S501 will be described later.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step S491) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area in step S511. This is because information on the deviation is set in advance before the big hit determination. Next, in step S512, a big hit random number is loaded from the big hit random number saving area (for special figure 1) and prepared, and in step S513, a big hit determination process is performed. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 1 extracted this time is in the jackpot range (a value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matching the jackpot judgment value). If it is within the range of the big hit, it can be judged as a big hit (detailed routine will be described later).

The check result in step S513 is determined in step S514. If the determination result is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S515 to save the big hit flag 1 area by overwriting the big hit information, and in the subsequent step S516, the big hit random number save area. Clear (0) (for special figure 1) and return to prepare for the next determination.
On the other hand, when NO at step S514 (when it is off), the process jumps to step S515 and proceeds to step S516. Therefore, at this time, the processing ends in a state in which the shift information is saved in the jackpot flag 1, and the jackpot flag 1 is not set.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S492) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S521 whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (whether the big hit information is saved). To do.
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol table of Special Figure 1 includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value Subsequently, in step S524, the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number save area (for special figure 1), and in step S525, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired. In step S526, the acquired stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area.

Next, in step S527, it is determined whether or not normal power support is in progress. The general electric power support is an operation in which the opening / closing member 26a of the second start winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power) is opened to support the start winning prize. Such support is done.
If the power transmission support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S528, and after preparing the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table at the time of high probability and time reduction, the process proceeds to step S529. On the other hand, if the power transmission is not being supported, the process branches to step S530 to prepare a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table at the low probability, and proceeds to step S529.
In step S529, a stop symbol information setting process for setting stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol 1 stop symbol (big hit symbol) is performed. The details of the stop symbol information setting process in step S529 will be described later.

Next, in step S531, a decoration special figure command table (in this table, a decoration special figure 1 command (ACTION) is defined) is set, and in step S532, a decoration special figure 1 corresponding to the symbol information is displayed. After performing the process of acquiring the command (ACTION), in step S533, the process of acquiring the decoration special figure 1 command (MODE) is performed, and these commands are saved in the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step S534). .
In step S535, the RWM jackpot symbol random number save area (for special figure 1) is cleared to 0, and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S522 that the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (NO), the processing in steps S523 to S529 is not performed, and the process branches to step S536. Then, in step S536, the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area, the process proceeds to step S537, the symbol information at the time of disconnection is saved in the symbol information area, and then the process proceeds to step S531, and thereafter Perform the process.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 (step S471) in the special figure ordinary process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, first, whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the big hit flag 2 is set (step S541). Details of the big hit flag 2 setting process in step S541 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S542) related to the setting of the second special figure stop symbol (special figure 2 stop symbol), the second special figure stop symbol number (special figure 2 stop symbol number) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S543). The test signal corresponding to the second special figure stop symbol number (special symbol 2 stop symbol number) includes a symbol 3 data signal, and this signal continues to be output until the data value changes. Details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process in step S542 will be described later.
Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is saved in the symbol information (work) area (step S544).

Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step S545), and the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step S546).
Subsequently, a table (for special figure 2) for setting information regarding the variation pattern is prepared (step S547), and special figure information setting processing (step S548) for setting special figure information is performed. Subsequently, among the variation modes in the second special figure variation display game, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step S549) for setting the second half variation pattern, the variation for setting the variation aspect of the second special figure variation display game Pattern setting processing (step S550) is performed. Thereafter, the fluctuation start information setting process (step S551) for setting the fluctuation start information of the second special figure is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.
Details of the special figure information setting process in step S548, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step S549, the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S550, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in step S551 will be described later.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step S541) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area in step S561. This is because information on the deviation is set in advance before the big hit determination. Next, in step S562, a big hit random number is loaded from the big hit random number save area (for special figure 2) and prepared, and in step S563, a big hit determination process is performed. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 2 extracted this time is in the jackpot range (a value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matching the jackpot judgment value) If it is within the range of the big hit, it can be judged as a big hit (detailed routine will be described later).

The check result in step S563 is determined in step S564. If the determination result is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S565 to save the big hit flag 2 area by overwriting the big hit information, and in the subsequent step S566, the big hit random number save area Clear (0) (for special figure 2) and return to prepare for the next determination.
On the other hand, when NO in step S564 (when there is a loss), the process jumps to step S565 and proceeds to step S566. Therefore, at this time, the processing ends in a state where the shift information is saved in the jackpot flag 2, and the jackpot flag 2 is not set.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S542) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S571 whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (whether the big hit information is saved). To do.
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol table of Special Figure 2 includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value Subsequently, in step S574, the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the jackpot symbol random number save area (for special figure 2), and in step S575, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired. In step S576, the acquired stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area.

Next, in step S577, it is determined whether or not normal power support is in progress. If the power transmission support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S578, and after preparing the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table at the time of high probability and time reduction, the process proceeds to step S579. On the other hand, if the power transmission support is not in progress, the process branches to step S580 to prepare a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table at the low probability, and the process proceeds to step S579.
In step S579, stop symbol information setting processing for setting stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol 2 stop symbol (big hit symbol) is performed. Details of the stop symbol information setting process in step S579 will be described later.

Next, in step S581, a decoration special command command table (decoration special figure 2 command (ACTION) is defined in this table) is set, and in step S582, the decorative special figure 2 corresponding to the symbol information is displayed. After performing the process of acquiring the command (ACTION), in step S583, the process of acquiring the decoration special figure 2 command (MODE) is performed, and these commands are saved in the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step S584). .
In step S585, the RWM jackpot symbol random number saving area (for special figure 2) is cleared to 0, and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S572 that the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (NO), the processing from step S573 to step S579 is not performed, and the process branches to step S586. In step S586, the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area, the process proceeds to step S587, the symbol information at the time of disconnection is saved in the symbol information area, and then the process proceeds to step S581. Perform the process.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing (step S513, step S563) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, processing for setting a lower limit judgment value for jackpot judgment is performed in step S591. Thereafter, in step S592, it is checked whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, that is, the big hit random number value read in step S512 of FIG. If it is determined in step S593 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value, the process branches to step S594, and the determination result is set as a deviation, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value in step S593, the process proceeds to step S595, and it is determined whether the probability is high. This is to determine whether or not the jackpot probability is high due to the probability variation, that is, whether or not the probability of the hit result in the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (probability variation state). Judgment. If the probability is high, a process of setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination at the time of high probability is performed in step S596, and then the process proceeds to step S597.
If it is determined in step S595 that the probability is not high, the process branches to step S598, where processing for setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the case of low probability is performed, and then processing proceeds to step S597.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value at the time of high probability and low probability is set, if the value of the target big hit random number is between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value (zone), You will be able to judge.
Therefore, in step S597, it is checked whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (exceeded the upper limit determination value), and it is determined in step S598 that the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S598). ; YES), since it can be determined that it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S594, where the determination result is set as a deviation and the process returns.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S598 that the value of the target big hit random number is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value (not exceeding the upper limit determination value) (step S598; NO), the target big hit random number value becomes the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination. In the interval between the values (zone), it is determined that the game is a big hit, and the big hit is set as the determination result in step S600 and the process returns.

[Stop symbol information setting process]
Next, details of the stop symbol information setting process (step S529) in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process and the stop symbol information setting process (step S579) in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the stop symbol information setting process, first, in step S611, symbol information corresponding to the target stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the symbol information area.
Here, when the symbol information is acquired, the income is obtained from the information defined on the prepared stop symbol information table, and the contents are as follows (the same applies to each information described later).
-Symbol information-Probability variation judgment flag-Round number upper limit value information-Opening information for special prize opening-Special effect information (for example,
・ Special production information (for example, whether or not there is a promotion production execution period after the big hit)
Here, the promotion effect is the following concept.
In the case of the present embodiment, when a normal symbol is hit, if a specific rotation speed (for example, 20, 50, 100th rotation) is reached within a short period after the end of the big hit, the normal big hit probability (normal mode) to a high probability The promotion effect of whether to be promoted to the mode is performed. This promotion effect gives the player a great sense of expectation that it may become a probable change (becomes a high probability mode due to a probability variation), and is an effect with a throbbing feeling.
However, in the pachinko machine 1, whether it is a certain change or not is determined in advance, but the player can be confident because there is only an ambiguous notification on the screen of the display device 41 that conveys the effect to the external player. There is no state. Therefore, by performing a promotion effect, the player is notified whether or not the probability change is confirmed.
In addition, the number of times of promotion promotion is also decided in advance (this information is also included in the special production information), and if it is not a positive change, the above-mentioned three times of promotion will be performed, all fail The production will end in

Next, in step S612, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination flag is saved in the probability variation determination flag area of the RWM.
Next, in step S613, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the round number upper limit information is saved in the round number upper limit information area of the RWM. Subsequently, in step S614, the special winning opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special winning opening release information area of the RWM. Next, in step S615, special effect information (for setting) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, the special effect information (for setting) is saved in the special effect information (for setting) area of the RWM, and stop symbol information setting is performed. The process ends.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps S498 and S548) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure information setting process, first, the prepared flag is saved in the symbol discrimination flag (work) area as a flag indicating the target special figure (step S621).
Here, the information defined on the table prepared for the special map information includes the following.
・ Special figure hold count area address ・ First half change information 1 area address ・ First half change information 2 area address ・ First half change group information area address ・ Second half change group information area address ・ Random number save area address (change pattern random number 1)
・ Random number save area address (fluctuation pattern random number 2)
-Address of the second half variable number area-Address of the random number save area (variation pattern random number 3)

Next, in step S622, the target special figure holding number is loaded as the information generation parameter 1, and special effect information (for distribution) is loaded as the information generation parameter 2 in step S623. Next, in step S624, it is determined whether or not general power support is in progress (the concept of general power support is as described above). If the power transmission support is not in progress, the process branches to NO in step S624 and proceeds to step S625 to set a value of no power transmission support as the information generation parameter 3. Next, in step S626, first-half fluctuation information 1 is generated based on the information generation parameters 1 and 3, and saved in the first-half fluctuation information 1 area. Subsequently, in step S627, the first half variation information 2 is generated based on the information generation parameter 2, saved in the first half variation information 2 area, and in step S628, the symbol information (for work) is loaded as the information generation parameter 4, and further step In S629, the symbol determination flag (for work) is loaded as the information generation parameter 5.
Next, in step S630, first-half variable group information is generated based on the information generation parameters 4 and 6, and saved in the first-half variable group information area. Subsequently, in step S631, the latter half fluctuation group information is generated based on the information generation parameter 1, saved in the target latter fluctuation group information area, and in step S632, the information generation parameters 2, 4, and 5 are changed to the fluctuation group selection table point. Generate, prepare and return. Therefore, at this time, the special map information without ordinary power support is set.

On the other hand, if ordinary power support is being performed in step S624, the process branches to step S633 to determine whether there is a high probability. If NO (low probability), the process proceeds to step S634, where the information generation parameter 3 has a low probability. And after setting the value during the ordinary power support, the process returns to step S626, and thereafter, the process returns from step S626 to step S632.
Therefore, at this time, low-probability and special figure information during normal power support are set.
If it is determined in step S633 that the probability is high (YES), the process branches to step S635 to check whether the first-half information generation parameter 2 is executing the special effect, and the check result is determined in step S636. When NO is NO (special effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S637 to set a high probability and a value during normal power support as the information generation parameter 3, and then to step S626, and thereafter, step S626 to step S632. Execute and return.
Therefore, at this time, high probability and special figure information during ordinary power support are set.
Further, when it is determined in step S636 that the first half information generation parameter 2 is executing the special effect (YES), the process branches to step S638, and the value at the time of executing the special effect is set as the information generation parameter 3, and then the step The process returns to S626, and thereafter, Steps S626 to S632 are executed, and the process returns.
Accordingly, at this time, the special figure information at the time of executing the special effect is set.

[Second half fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the latter half variation pattern setting process (steps S499 and S549) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the latter-half variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection table corresponding to the special figure information (for example, the first special figure) set in the special figure information setting process among the first special figure and the second special figure. Processing for calculating and preparing the address of the variation group selection table corresponding to the pointer is performed (step S641).
Note that information defined in the variation group selection address table before calculation includes the address of the variation group selection table, which is as many as the number of variation group selection table pointers.

Next, it is checked whether or not the symbol information (for work) set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is out of symbol information (step S642). In step S634, the symbol information (for work) is out of symbol. If it is determined to be information (YES), the process proceeds to step S644 to load the latter-half fluctuation group information from the target latter-half fluctuation group information area, and then, in step S645, an address corresponding to the latter-half fluctuation group information is additionally calculated. The variable group selection table is prepared and the process proceeds to step S646.
Note that the information defined on the outlier variation group selection table includes the address of the variation group selection table, but this is an additional calculation to change the table for each number of holds, The big hit does not affect the number of holds.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S634 that the symbol information (for work) is not out of the symbol information (NO), the process jumps to step S644 and step S645 and proceeds to step S646.
Therefore, when the symbol information (for work) is out of symbol information, information corresponding to the out symbol is prepared.

In step S646, a variation pattern random number 1 composed of 2 bytes (a plurality of bytes) is prepared as a determination random number for selecting the latter half variation pattern group of the special figure variation display game, and then prepared. In step S647, a 2-byte distribution process related to the specification of the latter half variation selection table is performed.
Next, after acquiring and preparing the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained by performing the 2-byte sorting process (step S648), as a determination random number for selecting the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared from the target area (step S649), and a distribution process (step S650) for specifying the latter half fluctuation number is performed.
Next, a process for obtaining the latter half variation number obtained by performing the distribution process (step S651) is performed, and the latter half variation number is saved in the latter half variation number area to be the target of the RWM (step S652). The latter half variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (steps S500 and S550) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the variation pattern setting process, first, of the first special figure and the second special figure, it corresponds to the special figure information (eg, the first special figure) set in the special figure information setting process, that is, the first half of the target. A process of loading the first-half variable group information from the variable group information area (step S661) is performed.
Next, the address of the first-half variation group table corresponding to the first-half variation group information is calculated (step S662), and then the second-half variation number is loaded from the target area (step S663). An address corresponding to the variable number is calculated (step S664).

Next, whether or not the latter half variation number is a reachless variation number is checked (step S665), and if the latter half variation number is a reachless variation number (step S666; YES), the target first half variation is determined. First half variation information 1 is loaded from the information 1 area (step S667).
If it is determined in step S666 that the second half variation number is not a reachless variation number (step S666; NO), the process branches to step S669, and after loading the first half variation information 2 from the target first half variation information 2 area, The process proceeds to step S668.
Next, in step S668, the calculated table is used to calculate an address corresponding to the first-half variation information, and in step S670, the address of the first-half variation selection table is acquired from the calculated address, and preparation processing is performed. .
Subsequently, in step S671, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the target area, and in step S672, a sorting process for specifying the first half fluctuation number is performed. Next, in step S673, a process for acquiring and preparing the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution process is performed, and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (steps S500 and S550) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the change start information setting process, first, after clearing the RWM save area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step S681), the first half change time corresponding to the first change number acquired in the change pattern setting process A process of acquiring a value in the value table (step S682) is performed, and subsequently, a process of acquiring a first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is performed (step S683), and further obtained in the second half variation pattern setting process. Then, processing for setting the latter half fluctuation time value table corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is performed (step S684).

Next, a process of acquiring the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (step S685) is performed, and then a process of adding the acquired first half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value (step S686) is performed. After that, the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S687).
Subsequently, after the fluctuation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is calculated and prepared (step S688), the value of the second half fluctuation number is prepared as a fluctuation command (ACTION) (step S689), and command setting processing ( Step S690) is performed.

Next, from the RWM decoration special command area, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decorative special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared (step S691), and command setting processing (step S692) is performed. Do.
Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command (MODE) corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag (that is, related to the special figure hold number displayed on the display device 41) is prepared (step S693), and the variable symbol determination flag is set. The address of the random number saving area of the first special figure of the RWM corresponding to is set (step S694).

Next, the special figure hold number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated (-1) (step S695), and a decorative special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step S696). Then, command setting processing (step S697) is performed.
Then, among the first special figure and the second special figure, the random number save area of the fluctuation target special figure corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is shifted (step S698), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step S699). ) To complete the variation start information setting process.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step S474) in the special-figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step S711, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special game process number area in step S712. Save. In step S713, a non-customer waiting flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area. In step S714, a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S715, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. In step S716, the symbol fluctuation control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control timer area, and the routine is terminated. .
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process for the special figure 1 is performed.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step S472) in the special figure usual process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step S721, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special game process number area in step S722. Save. In step S723, a non-customer waiting flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area. In step S724, a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S725, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, and in step S726, the symbol fluctuation control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control timer area, and the routine is terminated. .
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process with respect to the special figure 2 is performed.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step S360) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special symbol changing process, first, a symbol stop command is prepared in step S729, and then in step S730, a command setting process (described later) is executed for the symbol stop command (prepared in step S729). The symbol stop command instructs the effect control device 300 to stop displaying the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol). The special figure of the collective display device 35 is not changed / stopped by a command, but the game control device 100 itself outputs ON / OFF data of LEDs to the collective display device 35 to control the change and the like. .
Moreover, although this example is a structure which transmits a symbol stop command from a main board | substrate (game control apparatus 100) to a sub board | substrate (production control apparatus 300) in this way, it is not limited to this aspect. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the time is automatically measured on the sub-board side (that is, not depending on the command from the main board) and the design is stopped (stopping the variation display of the special design). It is not always necessary to transmit a symbol stop command from the main board. However, in this case as well, a process of receiving a symbol stop command may be left as a process on the sub-board side so that it can be used at the time of inspection or the like.
Subsequently, in the special symbol changing process, it is checked in step S731 whether the symbol information is out of symbol information, and if it is determined in step S732 to be YES (in symbol information is out of symbol information), the process proceeds to step S733, and the latter half. Check if the variation number is a non-reach variation number. The check result is determined in step S734, and if YES (variation without reach), a special figure display time pointer at the time of deviation is set in step S735. In step S736, a special figure display time table is set. In step S737, a special figure display time corresponding to the special figure display time pointer is acquired. In step S738, the special figure display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. To do. Thereafter, a special figure display transition setting process is performed in step S739, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the second half variation number is not the variation number without reach in step S734, it is determined as NO (variation with reach), branching to step S740, and after setting the special figure display time pointer at the time of reach, step S736 is performed. Proceed to and perform the following processing.
If it is determined in step S732 that the symbol information is not the symbol information (NO), the process branches to step S741 to set a special symbol display time pointer at the time of big hit, and then proceeds to step S736 to perform the subsequent processing.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, details of the special figure display process transition setting process (step S739) in the special figure changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, "2" (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure display process) is set in step S751, and the process number (here "2") is set in the special figure game process number area in step S752. Save. In step S753, a signal related to the special figure 1 variation end process is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step S754, a signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end process is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S755, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area, in step S756, the stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and in FIG. Save the stop flag in the control flag area and end the routine.
In this way, a process for shifting to the special figure display process is performed.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step S361) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded (step S761), and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step S761). Step S762) is performed.
Next, it is checked whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S763), and if it is determined that the big hit is a big hit (step S764; YES), the process jumps to step S770 to clear the RWM big hit flag 1 area. Next, in step S771, a signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area, and the process proceeds to step S772.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S764 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step S764; NO), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded. (Step S765), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 region (Step S766) is performed.
Subsequently, it is checked whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S767). (Step S769), and the process proceeds to step S772.
If it is determined in step S768 that there is no big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S787 in FIG. At this time, the processing is advanced after determining whether there is a short time.

Now, after saving the test signal related to the special figure 1 big hit in step S769 or saving the test signal related to the special figure 2 big hit in step S771, processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step S772) is performed.
Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is saved in the round number upper limit area (step S773). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LED pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step S774).
Next, a probability information command at the time of low probability related to the information that sets the probability of hitting results in the normal variation display game and the special variation display game as the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step S775). Then, command setting processing (step S776) is performed.
Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information is prepared (step S777), and a command setting process (step S778) is performed.

Thereafter, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area (step S779), and a command setting process (step S780) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step S781), and the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the winning prize opening information is set (step S782). The big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game process timer area (step S783).
Thereafter, after resetting the illegal winning number area for the special winning opening (step S784), the illegal winning period illegal monitoring period flag area is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step S785).

Then, transition setting processing 1 (step S786) for setting various data for shifting to fanfare / interval processing, specifically, process number “3” relating to fanfare / interval processing, switching of various states A process for setting information is performed, and the special figure changing process is terminated.
Here, as information for switching the various states, for example, a signal indicating that the game state for output is a special game state (big hit state) on the external information terminal board 55, a general-purpose variation display game, and a special diagram variation A test signal indicating that the probability of a winning result in the display game is a normal probability state (low probability state), information on clearing the number of winnings to the big winning opening during the big winning opening fraud monitoring period, and the special gaming state Information related to clearing the number of rounds, information to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of a high probability state, information to set the probability of a hit result in a normal fluctuation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state), power failure Information for turning off the gaming state display LED (high probability notification LED) relating to the display of the high probability state that is turned on at the time of restoration, information for controlling the special figure variation display game (for example, in the special figure variation display game) Information indicating that the probability of a hit result is a normal probability state (low probability state), and the probability of being a hit result in a normal map change display game or a special figure change display game that is output to the effect control device 300 when a power failure is restored. For example, information indicating a normal probability state (low probability state), information on clearing the number of remaining time reduction fluctuations after a big hit), and the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S768 that the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step S768; NO) as shown in FIG. 51, as shown in FIG. A process for determining whether or not the time-short operation state is set and whether the time-short state is set to extend the opening time of the normal variation winning device 26 is performed (step S787).
Here, if it is determined that the gaming state is not in the time saving state (step S787; NO), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S788) for setting various data for shifting to the special figure normal process, specifically, Then, the process for setting the process number “0” or the like related to the special figure normal process is performed in the table, and the special figure display process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S787 that the gaming state is the time-short state (step S787; YES), the number of time-varying changes (time After updating (-1) the number of shortening fluctuations (step S789), processing for determining whether or not the number of time-varying fluctuations after the update is “0” (step S790) is performed.
Here, if it is determined that the number of short-time fluctuations is not “0” (step S790; NO), the process proceeds to step S788, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S790 that the number of time-varying fluctuations is “0” (step S790; YES), that is, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time-shortening state in which the special figure fluctuation display game is in the time-shortening operation state. ) Is completed, the probability information command for ending the short-time operation state of the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game and the state of extending the opening time of the normal variation prize-winning device 26 (short-time state). Is prepared (step S791), and command setting processing (step S792) is performed.
Next, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the short period) (step S793) for setting various data for shifting to the special figure normal process when the time reduction is completed, specifically, in the table, Process number “0” related to the special figure normal process, information related to the end of the state (short time state) in which the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal figure fluctuation display game are in the short-time operation state, and the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is extended. Is set, and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2 (at the end of short time)]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) (step S793) in the special figure display process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure normal process) is set in step S801, and the process number (“0” in this case) is set in the special figure game process number area in step S802. Save. Next, in step S803, a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S804, a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area.

  Next, at step S805, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area, and at step S806, the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area. Next, in step S807, a special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area, and in step S808, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery. Next, in step S809, the variable symbol determination flag area is reset, and in step S810, the special effect information (for distribution) area is reset and the process returns.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step S786) in the special figure display process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / interval processing) is set in step S821, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S822. Save. Next, in step S823, the signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S824, the signal related to the end of the high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area.

  Next, in step S825, the big prize opening illegal winning number area is reset, and in step S826, the round number area is reset. Next, in step S827, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area, and in the normal game mode flag area, the normal low probability & no power support flag is saved in step S828. Next, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is reset in step S829, the high probability notification flag area is reset in step S830, the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area in step S831, and the power failure is restored in step S832. Save the probability information command (low probability) in the time transmission command area. Next, in step S833, the short time variation count area is reset, and in step S834, the special effect information (for distribution) area is reset and the process returns.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step S362) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process during the fanfare / interval, first, a process of updating (+1) the number of rounds in the special gaming state (step S841) is performed, and then the opening time of the big prize opening in each round in the special gaming state (of the variable winning device 27) In order to determine the opening time of the opening / closing member 27b (hereinafter the same as appropriate), it is checked whether or not the special prize opening information is long open.
In addition, as the opening time (opening time of the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27) in each round in the special gaming state, the short opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds) and the opening time are short. Long open (for example, 25 seconds). For this determination, for example, a special winning opening release information determination flag is set, and it is checked whether the special winning opening release information determination flag is a long opening with a long opening time of the special winning opening (for example, 25 seconds). To do so.

The check result in step S842 is determined in step S843. If YES (long release with long open time), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S844), and command setting processing (step S845) is performed.
Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step S846), and command setting processing (step S847) is executed. Do.
Then, a process of setting a long opening (for example, 25000 ms = 25 seconds) having a long opening time as the opening time (opening time of the big winning opening) of the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 in each round of the special gaming state (step S848). ) Is saved in the special game process timer (step S849).
Next, a process for setting a process for opening a prize winning opening process for setting various data for shifting to a process for opening a prize winning opening (step S850), specifically, a process number “4” related to the process for opening a prize winning opening. ”, A test signal relating to the opening of the grand prize opening, a control signal (ON signal) relating to driving of the grand prize opening solenoid 133 for opening the grand prize opening, information relating to clearing the number of prizes received in the big prize opening, etc. The setting process is performed and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S843 that the opening time of the big prize opening is not long open (NO), that is, if the opening time of the big prize opening is short opening, the process proceeds to step S851. The opening time is set to a short opening (for example, 800 ms = 0.8 seconds), and the process proceeds to step S849.
Therefore, when the number of rounds per jackpot is 15, the opening time related to the long opening is saved as the opening time of the big prize opening in the special game processing timer, and when the number of rounds per jackpot is 2, As the opening time of the winning opening, the opening time related to the short opening is saved in the special game processing timer.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
Next, details of the process for setting the transition to the process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval process (step S850) will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a process number “4” (corresponding to a process number related to the special winning opening opening process) is set in step S861, and a process number (in this case, “4”) is set in the special figure game process number area in step S862. ). Next, in step S863, a signal related to the start of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area. As a signal relating to the opening of the big prize opening, there is, for example, a signal in which the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on.
Next, in step S864, ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area, and in step S865, the special winning opening count is reset and the process returns.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step S363) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big prize opening opening process, first, it is checked whether or not the big prize opening information is a long opening with a long opening time (for example, 25 seconds) (step S871). This is determined using, for example, a special winning opening release information determination flag.
If it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening is long open (step S872; YES), the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. Thus, processing for checking whether or not the current round has reached the upper limit value (that is, the final round) is performed (step S873).

The result of the check in step S873 is determined in step S874, and if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step S874; NO) as a result of the determination, an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared. (Step S875), command setting processing (Step S876) is performed.
Subsequently, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step S877), and a command setting process (step S878) is executed. Do.

  Next, a big winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step S879) for setting various data for shifting to the winning prize remaining ball processing, specifically, the process number “5” related to the winning winning opening remaining ball processing. ”, Processing for setting a processing time related to the big winning opening remaining ball processing to be saved in the special game processing timer, a control signal (off signal) related to driving the big winning opening solenoid 133 for closing the big winning opening, and the like. To finish the process during opening of the special winning opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S874 that the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step S874; YES), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen is prepared at the end of the special gaming state. After performing the command setting process (step S876) (step S880), the process proceeds to step S877 and the subsequent processes are performed.
That is, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the RWM decoration special figure command area (step S877), and a command setting process (step S878) is performed. After that, the big winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step S879) for setting various data for shifting to the winning prize remaining ball processing is performed. Specifically, the processing number “5” relating to the winning ball remaining ball processing, the processing time relating to the winning ball remaining ball processing to be saved in the special game processing timer, and the winning port solenoid for closing the winning port. Processing for setting a control signal (off signal) and the like related to driving 133 is performed, and the processing for opening the special prize opening is completed.

  If it is determined in step S872 that the opening time of the big prize opening is not long open (step S872; NO), that is, if the opening time of the big prize opening is short opening (for example, 0.8 seconds), Without setting the interval command (step S876), the decoration special drawing command (step S878), and the ending command (step S874), the process proceeds to step S879 and the winning prize remaining ball process is performed. The winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (step S879) for setting various data for performing is performed. Specifically, the processing number “5” relating to the winning ball remaining ball processing, the processing time relating to the winning ball remaining ball processing to be saved in the special game processing timer, and the winning port solenoid for closing the winning port. Processing for setting a control signal (off signal) and the like related to driving 133 is performed, and the processing for opening the special prize opening is completed.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting process (step S879) in the above-described big winning opening opening process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “5” (corresponding to the process number related to the big winning opening remaining ball process) is set in step S881, and the process number (here, “5”) is set in the special game process number area in step S882. ). Next, in step S883, a remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 ms) is set, and in step S884, the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Next, in step S885, the big prize opening solenoid output data area is turned OFF. Save data and return.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step S364) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round number reaches the upper limit value by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area. It is checked whether or not (round) (step S891).
If it is determined in step S891 that the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step S892; NO), an interval time table is set (step S893), and the big prize opening information and the current round are set. The interval time corresponding to the number is acquired (step S894), and the interval time is further saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S895). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step S896) for setting various data for transitioning to the fanfare / interval process, specifically, the process number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval process, The processing time for the fanfare / interval processing to be saved in the game processing timer, processing for setting a test signal indicating the end of the operation of the variable winning device 27, and the like are performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

  On the other hand, as a result of the check in step S891, if it is determined that the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step S892; YES), a process of setting an ending time table (step S897) is performed and the symbol information is handled. After obtaining the ending time (step S898), the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S899).

  Next, the jackpot end process transition setting process (step S900) for setting various data for shifting to the jackpot end process, specifically, the process number “6” related to the jackpot end process, and the blockage of the big prize opening Information related to clearing of each parameter in the test signal, special gaming state (for example, information relating to clearing the number of winnings to the big prize opening, information relating to clearing the number of rounds in the special gaming state, upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state Information related to clearing the value, information related to clearing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds, information related to clearing the flag for opening information determination whether the opening time of the big winning opening is long open or short open), etc. The processing for setting is performed, and the winning ball remaining ball processing is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step S896) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to the fanfare / interval processing) is set in step S911, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S912. Save. Next, in step S913, a signal related to the end of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area and the process returns. As a signal related to the end of the big prize opening, there is, for example, a signal obtained by turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (step S900) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “6” (corresponding to the process number related to the big hit end process) is set in step S921, and the process number (here “6”) is saved in the special figure game process number area in step S922. To do. Next, in step S923, a signal related to the completion of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S924, the winning prize count is reset, in step S925, the number of rounds is reset, and in step S926, the round number upper limit area is reset. Subsequently, in step S927, the round number upper limit value information area is reset, and in step S928, the big prize opening release information area is reset and the process returns.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (step S365) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big hit end process, first, it is checked whether the probability variation determination flag set in the stop symbol information setting process is a high probability entry flag (step S931), and the check result is determined in step S932. It is determined that it is not a rush, and the process proceeds to step S933.
In step S933, jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed. Since this is a state that is not a high-probability rush, a process for shifting to a mode that shortens the time after the big hit ends is set. Next, a probability information command corresponding to the probability variation determination flag is prepared in step S934, and command processing is performed in step S935.

In step S936, special effect information (for setting) is loaded and saved in the special effect information (for distribution) area. After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step S937) for setting various data for shifting to the special figure normal process. A process for setting a flag for defining the monitoring period (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) or the like is performed, and the jackpot ending process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the determination in step S932 is YES (high probability entry), the process branches to step S938 to perform the jackpot end setting process 2. Since this is a state of high probability rushing, it sets processing for shifting to a mode in which probability fluctuation (high probability start) occurs after the big hit. Next, the processing after step S934 is executed.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step S933) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area in step S941. A signal related to the start of a short time in this region is, for example, a big hit 2 signal ON. In step S942, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals related to the start of a short time in this area are as follows.
・ Turn on special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction status signal
-Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Turn on the normal signal 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal
・ Turn on the normal extension 1 signal
Next, in step S943, the number of hour and hour is saved in the game state display number area, and in step S945, the low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Next, in step S946, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, and in step S947, the initial value (for example, 100) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved in the time fluctuation number area and the process returns.
In this way, the process of shifting to the mode that shortens the time after the big hit ends is performed.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step S938) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area in step S951. The signal relating to the start of high probability in this region is, for example, a big hit 2 signal ON. In step S952, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals related to the start of a short time in this area are as follows.
・ Turn on special symbol 1 high probability state signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 high probability state signal
・ Turn on special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction status signal
-Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Turn on the normal signal 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal
・ Turn on the normal extension 1 signal
Next, in step S953, the number at the time of high probability is saved in the game state display number area, and in step S954, the common figure high probability & power support flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area. In step S955, the high probability & short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Next, in step S956, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, and in step S957, the time-varying fluctuation frequency area is reset and the process returns.
In this way, the process of shifting to a mode having a high probability after the end of the big hit is performed.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step S937) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure normal process) is set as a process number in step S961, and the process number (here, “0”) is set in the special figure game process number area in step S962. Save. In step S963, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area.
Here, the signals relating to the end of the big hit include OFF of the big hit 1 signal and OFF of the big hit 3 signal.

In step S964, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area. Here, the signals relating to the end of the jackpot are as follows.
・ Turn off the condition device operating signal
・ Off signal during continuous operation of equipment
・ Off signal per special symbol or signal per special symbol 2
Next, the probability variation determination flag area is reset in step S965, the round LED pointer area is reset in step S966, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area in step S967, and further in step S968. The special effect information (for setting) area is reset and the process returns.

Next, a description will be given of a flowchart relating to the usual game process. Here, “step B” is used as a step number.
[Normal game processing]
First, details of the usual game process (step S79) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 122 is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, the display of the usual figure is set, and the like.
First, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a general power prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the second start port switch 121 is performed. The details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, the normal game process timer has already expired, or the normal game process timer is updated (-1) to check whether the game process timer has expired (step B3), If it is determined that the usual game process timer has timed up (step B4; YES), a process for setting a reference figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the usual game process number (step B5) ) To obtain a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number using the table (step B6).
Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

In step B8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, A usual figure process (step B9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
Note that details of the normal processing (step B9) will be described later.
If the game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.
The details of the normal map changing process (step B10) will be described later.
If the game processing number is “2” in step B8, and if the result of the normal variation display game is a win, the public power release depending on whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is supported A general map display process (step B11) is performed for setting the time and setting information necessary for performing the normal map processing.
The details of the normal map display process (step B11) will be described later.

In step B8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step B12) is performed.
The details of the normal processing (step B12) will be described later.
If the game process number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the end process for each normal figure.
The details of the ordinary electric power remaining ball process (step B13) will be described later.
If the game process number is “5” in step B8, a normal figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9) is performed.
Note that details of the normal hit end process (step B14) will be described later.
Then, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) (step B15), the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) is prepared. The symbol variation control process (step B16) according to is performed, and the regular game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the usual game process timer has not expired (step B4; NO), the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21). Then, if it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B22; YES), the number of pending maps is acquired, and it is checked whether the number of pending maps is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (step). B23) If it is determined that the number of ordinary drawings reserved is less than the upper limit (step B24; YES), a process of updating (+1) the number of ordinary drawings reserved (step B25) is performed.

Then, after performing the process (step B26) of calculating the address of the random number save area corresponding to the updated number of pending reservations (step B26), the process of saving the acquired hit random number in the random number save area of the RWM (step B27) Then, the gate switch monitoring process ends.
Further, when it is determined in step B22 that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B22; NO), or when it is determined in step B24 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value ( Step B24: NO) The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned general game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the general power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal figure changing display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is performing a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) of opening operation (whether the normal figure winning figure is being hit) It is checked whether or not (step B31). If it is determined that the normal map is being reached (step B32; YES), it is checked whether or not there is an input to the second start port switch 121 (step B33), and there is an input to the second start port switch 121. If it determines with (step B34; YES), the process (step B35) which updates the count number of a utility counter (+1) will be performed.

Next, it is checked whether or not the count number of the updated electric power counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 9) (step B36), and the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B37; YES). If it is determined, the hit end value “4” is saved in the normal process control pointer area (step B38). Thereafter, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared to “0” (step B39), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.
In other words, if there is a win-winning prize exceeding the upper limit during the hit state of the normal map, the hit end is set in the mid-process control pointer at that time and The hit state in the figure ends in the middle.

  In step B32, it is determined that the vehicle is not hitting the normal map (step B32; NO), or in step B34, it is determined that there is no input to the second start port switch 121 (step B34; No) Or, when it is determined in step B37 that the count number has not reached the upper limit (step B37; NO), the power receiving switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the usual map routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the number of pending charts is “0” (step B41), and if the number of charts held is “0” (step B42; YES), After proceeding to Step B70 and performing the usual figure normal process transition setting process 1, the usual figure usual process is terminated. The normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 performs a process for repeating the normal figure normal process next time, and will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B42 that the number of pending maps is not 0 (step B42; NO), the process proceeds to step B43, where the probability of a hit result in the usual map fluctuation display game is higher than usual. It is determined whether or not it is in a probability state (that is, when a normal probability is high).
Here, if it is determined that it is not at the time of normal probability (normally variable winning device 26 is currently supported) (step B43; NO), the probability of a hit result in the general variable display game is not in a high probability state. From the random number save area, a random number is loaded and prepared (step B44), and a judgment value at the time of normal low probability is set (step B45).
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the value of the hit random number matches the determination value (step B46), and if the value of the hit random number does not match the determination value (step B47; NO), the hit flag area After the offset information is saved (step B48), processing for setting the stop symbol number at the time of shift is performed for the normal symbol stop symbol (step B49). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B50, and a process of clearing the random number saving area to “0” (step B50) is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B47 that the value of the hit random number matches the determination value (step B47; YES), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B51), and then the normal symbol stop symbol is hit. Processing for setting the stop symbol number at the time (step B52) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B50, and a process of clearing the random number saving area to “0” (step B50) is performed.
Also, if it is determined in step B43 that the normal figure has a high probability (step B43; YES), since the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game is in a high probability state, the random number save area is used. A winning random number is loaded and prepared (step B53), and a process of setting a lower limit judgment value at the time of normal probability (step B54) is performed.
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B55). The process of setting the upper limit determination value (step B57) is performed.
Then, it is checked whether or not the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step B58). After shifting and saving information for hitting a hit flag (step B51), a process of setting a stop symbol number at the time of hitting is performed (step B52) for the normal symbol stop symbol, and then the process shifts to step B50. Then, a process of clearing the random number save area to “0” (step B50) is performed.

  In step B56, it is determined that the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B56; YES), or in step B59, the value of the hit random number is determined to be greater than the upper limit determination value. Even in the case (step B59; YES), the process proceeds to step B48, and after the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B48), the stop symbol number at the time of shift is set in the normal stop symbol (Step B49) is performed, and then the process proceeds to Step B50.

Now, if the process has proceeded to step B50 via step B49 or step B52, the random number save area is cleared to 0 (step B50), and then the stop symbol number is displayed in the normal symbol stop symbol area. Is saved (step B60), and the signal corresponding to the universal symbol stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B61).
Subsequently, the process for shifting the hit random number save area (step B62) is performed, the process for clearing the free area after the shift is cleared (step B63), and then the number of pending reservations is updated (-1). The process (step B64) is performed.
In other words, in accordance with the execution of the map change display game related to the oldest general map hold 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the general map hold 2 to 4 that are held after the general map hold 1 is performed one by one. become. As a result of this processing, the value for the usual figure hold 2 to the usual figure hold 4 in the hit random number save area (for example, the hit random number) is moved from the usual figure hold 1 to the usual figure hold 3 in the hit random number save area. It becomes. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation 4 in the hit random number saving area is cleared and the number of usual figure reservations is decremented by one.

Next, a process of determining whether or not the normally variable winning device 26 is being supported (supporting ordinary power) (step B65) is performed. A process (step B66) for setting a usual fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) during support is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step B67, where the normal time change time when there is the general power support set in step B66 is saved in the normal game process timer (step B67), and the process proceeds to step S68.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B65 that the normal support is not being performed (step B65; NO), the process branches to step B69 to set a normal fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) when there is no general power support. The process (step B69) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step B67, and the fluctuation time of the usual figure when there is no ordinary power support set in step B69 is saved in the ordinary figure game process timer.
Then, after the process of step B67, a normal chart changing process transition setting process (step B68) for shifting to the normal chart changing process is performed, and the normal chart normal process ends.

[Usual map transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B70) in the above normal figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal routine processing) is set in step B81, and the processing number (here “0”) is set in the general game processing number area in step B82. Save. Next, in step B83, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, the normal process is shifted to the normal processing next time.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B68) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the process of changing the normal map) is set in step B91, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the game process number area of the normal game in step B92. Save. Next, in step B93, a signal relating to the start of normal fluctuation (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B94, the fluctuation flag is saved in the normal fluctuation control flag area. Next, in step B95, the variable timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the usual variable control timer area, and the process returns. As a result, the process shifts to the normal map change process next time.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process for changing the normal map (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, processing for setting transition to a normal map display process is performed in step B101. This is a setting for shifting to the normal map display processing, and details will be described later. After this processing, it returns.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map display process (step B101) in the process for changing the normal map will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “2” (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing for displaying the normal map) is set as a processing number in step B111, and the processing number (here, “2”) is set in the general game processing number area in step B112. Save. Next, in step B113, a normal map display time is set (for example, 600 ms). Next, in step B114, the normal figure display time is saved in the normal game process timer area, and in step B115, a signal related to the end of the normal figure change (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. . Next, in step B116, the stop flag is saved in the usual figure fluctuation control timer area and the process returns. As a result, the process moves to the normal map display process next time.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process of displaying a normal figure, first, a hit flag set in the normal process of normal figure is loaded (step B121), and a process of clearing the hit flag area (step B122) is performed.
Next, it is checked whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit (step B123), and if it is determined that the hit flag is not hit (step B124; NO), the process branches to step B125 and the normal processing transition setting process is performed. 1 (described with reference to FIG. 69), and the process for displaying the normal diagram is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B124 that the winning flag is winning (step B124; YES), a process for determining whether or not normal power support is being performed (step B126) is performed.
If it is determined that the power transmission is being supported (step B126; YES), a process (step B127) for setting a power transmission opening time (for example, 1.7 seconds) when the normally variable winning device 26 is being supported is performed. After that, a process of setting a hit start pointer when the normal variation winning device 26 is being supported (step B128) is performed. That is, when the normal variation winning device 26 is being supported, the winning start pointers (for example, the winning start pointers “0” to “4” are set so that the number of times the normal variation winning device 26 is opened is two or more times). ”, Etc., but here“ 0 ”) is set. Subsequently, a hit start pointer is saved in the middle process control pointer area per hit (step B129).
Next, after saving the normal power open time (for example, 1.7 seconds) set in step B127 in the normal game process timer area (step B130), the normal process transition setting process (step B131) is performed. Do. This is a setting for shifting to the normal processing during the normal map, and details will be described later. After this processing, it returns.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B126 that ordinary power support is not being performed (NO), the process branches to step B132, and the normal variable winning device 26 sets a normal power open time (for example, 0.3 seconds) when there is no support. After performing the above, a process (step B133) of setting “4” as a hit start pointer when the normal variation winning device 26 is not supported is performed. When the winning start pointer is set to “4”, the number of times the normal variation winning device 26 is released is one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B129.
When the process proceeds to step B129 by this route, the hit start pointer (in this case, “4”) is saved in the normal processing control pointer area per normal map, and then in step B130, the general power release set in step B132 is performed. The time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the normal game process timer area, the normal process transition setting process is performed in step B131, and the process returns.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map process (step B131) in the process for displaying the normal map will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal processing per ordinary figure) is set in step B141, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the ordinary game processing number area in step B142. Save. Next, in step B143, a signal related to the start of the normal signal (for example, the signal per normal symbol is turned ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned ON) are output in the test signal output data area. To save. Next, in step B144, the ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area, the normal power count is reset in step B145, then the normal power fraud winning number is reset in step B146, and the normal power fraud monitoring is performed in step B147. Save the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag in the period flag area and return. As a result, the next time, the routine shifts to the normal processing.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit process (step B12) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the normal processing per normal map, first, the normal processing control pointer per normal map is loaded and prepared (step B151), and then the loaded normal processing control pointer per normal map is a hit end value (for example, “4”, etc. ) (Step B152), and if it is determined that the value is not the hit end value (step B153; NO), a process (step B154) for updating (+1) the normal process control pointer area is performed. Do.
Next, a general electric operation transition setting process (step B155) is performed. Here, the operation of ordinary power is controlled. Then return.
Further, when it is determined in step B153 that the value is a hit end value (step B153; YES), the process is not performed without updating (+1) the normal process control pointer in step B154. Is transferred to step B155, and the subsequent processing is performed.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the ordinary power operation transition setting process (step B155) in the above-described ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, branching is performed using the control pointer in step B161. Here, the process branches according to the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step B151. Specifically, if the control pointer is “0” or “2” in step B161, the process branches to step B162 to set a wait time (for example, 800 ms), and in step B163, the normal game process timer area is set. The wait time is saved, and in the subsequent step B164, the data is saved to OFF in the power transmission solenoid output data area, and then the process returns. As a result, the closing time after the normal variation winning device 26 is opened becomes the above-mentioned wait time, and the normal variation winning device 26 is blocked during this period.

On the other hand, if the control pointer is “1” or “3” in step B161, the process branches to step B165 to set a normal power open time (for example, 1700 ms) at the time of normal power support, and a normal game in step B166. After the normal power release time is saved in the processing timer area, the data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in step B167, and then the process returns. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 26 becomes the above-mentioned normal power opening time, and the normal variable winning device 26 is opened during this period.
If the control pointer is “4” in step B161, the process branches to step B168 to set “4” as the process number, and in step B169, the process number (here, “4”) is set in the usual game process number area. ). Next, in step B170, a normal power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is set, in step S171, the normal power remaining ball processing time is saved in the general game processing timer area, and in step B172, the normal power solenoid output data is saved. Save OFF data in the area and return. Therefore, when the control pointer is “4”, the power transmission release control is terminated, and information necessary for performing the next power transmission remaining ball process is set.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B181, an end process transition setting process is performed for each normal map. This is a setting for shifting to a normal hit end process, which will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal call end process transition setting process (step B181) in the above-described ordinary electric power remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a process number “5” (corresponding to a process number related to the normal process end process) is set in step B191, and a process number (here, “5”) is set in the normal game process number area in step B192. Save. Next, in step B193, the normal ending time is set (for example, 100 ms), in step B194, the ending time is saved in the general game processing timer area, and in step B195, a signal relating to the end of the normal electric operation (for example, a normal electric accessory) (1) The signal during operation is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B196, the ordinary power count is reset, and in step B197, the middle processing control pointer area per ordinary figure is reset and the process returns. As a result, next time, the process shifts to the end process for each figure.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B14) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a normal process transition setting process 2 is performed in step B201. This is a setting for shifting to the normal routine transition setting process 2 and will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B201) in the above-mentioned normal figure end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal routine processing) is set in step B211 and the processing number (“0” in this case) is set in the normal game processing number area in step B212. Save. Next, in step B213, a signal related to the end of the normal drawing (for example, the signal per normal symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B214, the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, next time, the routine shifts to normal processing.

The flowchart related to the usual game process has been described above. Next, a description will be given of a subroutine after step S80 in the above-described timer interrupt process.
Here, description will be made using “step C” as the step number.
[Segment LED editing processing]
First, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The segment LED editing process is a process related to the segment LEDs provided in the collective display device 35 (FIGS. 2, 4, and 5). As described above, the collective display device 35 displays ordinary maps and special diagrams. In addition, a special figure or ordinary chart start memory hold display (special figure hold display, universal figure hold display) and a game state display are performed.
These displays are configured by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a seven-segment indicator) using LEDs as light emission sources. More specifically, for example, special figure 1 hold indicator, special figure 2 hold indicator, universal figure hold indicator, first game state display unit, second game state display unit, error display unit, round display unit, etc. The segment LED editing process includes segment LEDs having functions, and performs settings related to their drive.

In the segment LED editing process, first, a process of updating (+1) the display control timer (step C1) is performed.
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the display control timer is at the output ON timing (step C2), and if it is determined that the output is at the ON timing (step C3; YES), a process of setting the lighting pointer as the blinking control pointer (step) After performing C4), the process proceeds to step C5.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C3 that the output ON timing is not reached (step C3; NO), the process branches to step C6 and the process of setting the extinction pointer as the blinking control pointer (step C6) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step C5. Transition.
Here, the determination as to whether or not it is the output ON timing is to monitor the state of a specific bit. If it is “0”, it is determined that the output is not ON timing.
In particular, in this embodiment, when bit 5 of the display control timer is “1”, it is determined that the output is ON. At this time, for example, it is set so as to blink 128 ms.

When the process proceeds from step C4 or step C6 to step C5, in step C5, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved maps and the blinking control pointer set in step C4 or step C6 is acquired, and then the acquired display data is acquired. Are saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the usual hold display). Then, after acquiring the display data corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display) (step C7).
Subsequently, after acquiring the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator) (step C8).

Next, after acquiring the display data corresponding to the round LED pointer, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the round display section) (step C9).
Subsequently, after acquiring the display data corresponding to the game state display number, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the first game state display part or the second game state display part) (step C10). ).

Next, the high probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state at the time of power failure recovery is checked (step C11), and it is not the timing to notify the high probability (step C12; NO). If determined, the OFF data of the high-probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the error display section) (step C13), and the segment LED editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C12 that it is the timing to notify the high probability (step C12; YES), step C13 is skipped and the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality, and fraud notification is set to start or end.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor detection signal bit output from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and taken into the second input port 162 (input port 2) is checked (step C21), and the magnetic sensor detection signal is input. If it is determined that there is no (step C22; NO), the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C23).
Thereafter, it is checked whether the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time has already expired, or after the magnet fraud notification timer has been updated (-1), the timer has expired (step C24). ). If it is determined in the determination result of whether or not the magnet fraud notification timer has timed up that the time has not expired (step C25; NO), the routine returns and the routine is repeated.
If it is determined by the repetition of the routine that the magnet fraud notification timer has timed up, it is determined that the time has expired (step C25; YES), a magnet fraud notification end command (ACTION) is prepared ( Step C26) After performing the process of setting the magnet fraud release flag as the magnet fraud flag (step C27), the process proceeds to step C34 and the subsequent processes are performed. In this case, even if the routine is repeated, since it is a normal state in which no fraud has occurred, fraud notification is not performed. That is, the magnet fraud notification timer is always up.

On the other hand, if a fraud using a magnet is performed and it is determined in step C22 that a magnetic sensor detection signal is input (step C22; YES), the magnet fraud monitoring timer is updated (+1), and then the timer is timed. It is checked whether or not the time is up (step C28), and if it is determined that the time is not up (step C29; NO), the process branches to step C24 and the subsequent processes are performed. In determining whether the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out, it is determined that the time is up when the monitoring timer = 8. That is, the input of the magnetic sensor detection signal is interrupted eight times and continuously performed, so that it is determined that the time is up. This is because the sensing of the magnetic sensor switch 125 is 4 ms, and it is determined that the fraud has occurred in 32 ms. Therefore, if the magnetic sensor detection signal is turned ON by interrupting 8 times, it can be determined that the fraud is occurring.
Therefore, when the magnetic sensor detection signal is input continuously for a predetermined period, that is, a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 interrupts), the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out in step C29 (step C29; YES). If determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C30), and then the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C31).

Next, a magnet fraud notification command (ACTION) is prepared (step C32), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is set as a magnet fraud flag (step C33), and the set magnet fraud flag is compared with the value of the magnet fraud flag region ( Step C34). If the set magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C35; NO), it is determined that a new magnet fraud has occurred and the process proceeds to step C36, where the set magnet fraud flag is set as the magnet fraud flag. Save to area. Thereafter, command setting processing is performed (step C37), and the process returns.
Therefore, at this time, the fraud notification is performed by the continuous ON input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125. That is, fraud notification is started. As described above, the unauthorized start notification is started when the ON input of the magnetic sensor detection signal continues for 32 ms (that is, an unauthorized notification command is generated).

On the other hand, if the set magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C35; YES), the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 does not change. Return without doing. This is the case when the same magnet fraud continues.
After that, when there is no fraud, there is no ON input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 in Step C22, and the process branches to NO in Step C22 and proceeds to the processing after Step C23. At this time, a fraud notification end command is set in step C37.

In addition, when the magnetic sensor detection signal is not input for a certain period, that is, for a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 interrupts), the occurrence of magnet fraud has not yet been determined (illegal notification is being performed). In step C29, after it is determined that the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C29; NO), the process proceeds to step C24, and the subsequent processes are performed. .
Therefore, for the fraud notification end command, the fraud notification end command is set when 60000 ms further elapses from the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (60000 ms) from the start of the fraud notification command. That is, during the ON state of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and for about 60000 ms (60 seconds) after the signal is turned off, the unauthorized notification is performed, and as long as the signal is ON, the unauthorized notification is continued. It will be.
In summary, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is turned ON, after 32 ms, it is determined that a fraud has occurred, and a fraud notification command is set. While the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is ON, the magnet is fraudulent every 32 ms. When the monitoring timer expires and returns to the initial value and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is turned OFF, the fraud notification continues for about 60000 ms (60 seconds) from that point, and the fraud occurrence state is canceled after 60000 ms. An unauthorized notification end command is set.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S82) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, step C41 specific information signal editing processing is first performed. This is to acquire unique information (unique ID) of the main board, and details will be described later.
Next, in step C42, it is checked whether the security signal control timer has already expired or has expired after "-1" update. The security signal control timer checks fraud and gaming machine error status at regular intervals. The check result is determined in step C43. If NO, the process proceeds to step C44 to determine whether the unique information output request has been made. The unique information here is unique information of the main board, that is, unique ID.
If the unique information output request has not been requested in step C44, the process proceeds to step C45 to set the output request flag for the unique information signal when the power is turned on, and the output request flag for the unique information signal when the power is turned on in step C46. . As a result, the unique ID (the unique information of the main board) is output to the outside when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (for example, when the store is opened). After step C46, the security signal ON output data is set in step C47, and then the process proceeds to step C48.

If it has already been requested to output the unique information in step C44, the process jumps to steps C45 and 46 and proceeds to step C47.
On the other hand, if the security signal control timer has already expired in step C43 or has expired after updating "-1", the process branches to step C49 to clear the output request flag for the unique information signal when the power is turned on. After setting the security signal OFF output data in C50, the process proceeds to Step C48. That is, if the security signal control timer has already expired, the external output of information related to security is not set.

Next, in steps C48, 51, and 52, it is determined whether a magnet fraud has occurred, a special prize opening fraud has occurred, or a general electric power fraud has occurred. If any one or more frauds have occurred, the process proceeds to step C53 to set the output data of the security signal ON, and further set the output data of the gaming machine error state signal ON in step C54.
As a result, fraud and gaming machine error states are output to the outside. On the other hand, if NO in step C48, NO in step C51, NO in step C52, that is, if all NO in steps C48, 51, 52, the process branches from step C52 to step C55 and the gaming machine error state signal is OFF. Set the output data.

After step C54 or step C55, the process proceeds to step C56 to determine whether the door or frame is being opened. Here, the door is the glass frame 5, and the opening of the door is detected by the glass frame open detection switch 211. The frame is the front frame 4, and the opening of the frame is detected by the front frame open detection switch 212.
If the door or frame is being opened, the process proceeds to step C57 to determine whether or not the unique information output has been requested. If NO (not requested), the unique information signal for opening the door / frame is determined in step C58. After setting the output request flag and setting the output requested flag for the unique information signal when the door / frame is opened in step C59, the process proceeds to step C60. Therefore, at this time, when the glass frame 5 or the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened (for example, including unauthorized opening), a unique ID (specific information of the main board) is output to the outside. .

When the process proceeds from step C59 or C57 to step C60, the output data of the door / frame opening signal ON is set in step C60, the output data of the gaming machine error state signal ON is set in step C61, and the process proceeds to step C62. This is because an error signal is output to the outside when an event of door or frame opening occurs.
On the other hand, if NO in step C56, that is, if the door or frame is not open, an event of opening the door or frame does not occur, so there is no need to set such output data, and the process branches to step C63. Then, the output request flag for the unique information signal when the door / frame is opened is cleared, the output data of the door / frame opening signal OFF is set at step C64, and the process proceeds to step C62.

In step C62, it is determined whether or not the big hit operation is being performed. If the big hit operation is being executed, it is determined whether or not the unique information output has been requested in step C65. If NO (not required), the big win is determined in step C66. In step C67, the unique information signal output request flag is set. In step C67, the unique information signal output requested flag is set, and then the process proceeds to step C68. Therefore, at this time, when the big hit of the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the unique ID (the unique information of the main board) is output to the outside.
On the other hand, if the unique information output request has been made at the time of the big hit in step C65, the process jumps to steps C66 and 67 and proceeds to step C68.
In Step C68, output data of ON signal for one jackpot is set, and then the process proceeds to Step C69 to perform the start port signal editing process, and in the subsequent Step C70, the symbol determination number signal editing process is performed and the process returns. This is to edit the signal to be output to the outside for editing the signal to be output to the outside when the starting prize is received or to confirm the symbol of the special figure.
On the other hand, when the big hit is not in operation at step C62 (NO), after branching to step C71 and clearing the output request flag of the unique information signal at the big hit, the output data of the big hit 1 signal OFF is set at step C72. The process proceeds to step C69. Therefore, when no big hit occurs, there is no output of the unique ID (the unique information of the main board) to the outside.

[Inherent information signal editing processing]
Next, details of the unique information signal editing process (step C41) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step C81 whether serial communication is in progress. This is to determine whether or not the game control device 100 is executing serial communication with the management device 140 (or the card unit 551). If serial communication is being performed, the game control device 100 returns this time. If the serial communication is not in progress, the processing after step C82 is executed. The game control device 100 and the management device 140 are unidirectional communication, and only signal transmission from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 is allowed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not serial communication is in progress by checking whether or not the serial transmission buffer in the game control device 100 is communicating.
If serial communication is not in progress, it is checked in step C82 whether the output request flag for the unique information signal is set. If NO in step C83 (the output request flag is not set), the routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if YES in step C83 (output request flag is set), the process proceeds to step C84 to clear the output request flag of the unique information signal.
Here, the output request flag of the specific information signal is independently set corresponding to “security signal at power-on”, “door / frame opening signal”, and “big hit 1 signal”. If a plurality are established at the same time, priority is given and processing is performed one by one. Therefore, not all output request flags are cleared at once.
Next, CPU specific information acquisition processing is performed in step C85. This is a process of acquiring unique information, and details will be described later. After step C85, the process returns.

[CPU specific information acquisition processing]
Next, details of the CPU unique information acquisition process (step C85) in the above-described unique information signal editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C91, a start code is written in the serial transmission buffer in the game control apparatus 100. This is a code for causing the management device 140 on the receiving side to specify that it is the start of serial communication. Next, in step C92, it is determined whether or not the acquisition is only the chip code (main board unique ID). If the acquisition is only the chip code, the process jumps to step C97, and the chip code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer. The chip code as the individual identification information (unique ID) is read out, written into the serial transmission buffer, and the process returns. As a result, the unique ID is acquired and output to the management apparatus 140.

  On the other hand, if the acquisition is not only the chip code in step C92, the process proceeds to step C93 and the manufacturer code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the manufacturer code is read and written in the serial transmission buffer in step C94. Next, in step C95, the product code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step C96, the product code is read out and written in the serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step C97. As a result, the manufacturer code and the product code are acquired and output to the management device 140. Therefore, when the acquisition is not only the chip code in step C92, the manufacturer code, the product code, and the chip code are sequentially acquired and output to the management apparatus 140.

In this way, by using the serial transfer (transmission) function provided in advance in the game control apparatus 100, it is not necessary to prepare a transfer (transmission) process again with a program (for example, a game program). Increased efficiency.
In addition, the number of wirings is reduced as compared with parallel transfer (transmission), thereby reducing the cost.
In addition, as described above, the unique ID or the like is not transmitted from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 by serial communication, but may be transmitted by parallel communication, for example.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step C69) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the first start port switch 120 or the second start port switch 121.
When the routine starts, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not “0”, a process of updating (−1) (step C101) is performed. The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0.
Next, it is checked whether or not the start port signal output control timer that is decremented by a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) every time the timer interruption is performed is timed up (step C102). If it is determined that the start port signal output control timer is up (step C103; YES), it is checked whether the start port signal output count is 0 (step C104).

Here, if it is determined that the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (step C105; NO), the start port signal output count is updated (-1) (step C106), and then the start port signal is output to the start port signal output control timer region. The output control timer initial value (for example, 192 ms) is saved (step C107).
Here, as an initial value of the start port signal output control timer, an on-state (eg, high level) time (eg, 128 ms) and an off-state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms) of the start port signal are added. Save the time (eg, 192 ms).
This is because the start port signal output control timer set to the initial value (for example, 128 ms) starts to decrement (update (-1)) at the same time when the start port signal is turned on (high level). Even if the start port signal is turned off (low level) after the on-state time (128 ms) has elapsed, the start port signal output control timer continues to decrement, and the elapsed time after the start port signal is turned off. This is because the start port signal output control timer is timed up (“0”) when the time (64 ms) has elapsed.
Next, processing for setting ON data of the start port signal is performed (step C108). Thereafter, a process (step C109) of saving the start port signal set to ON in step C108 in the external information output data area is performed, and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
If it is determined in step C105 that the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step C105; YES), the process branches to step C110 and processing for setting OFF data of the start port signal is performed, and then step C109 is performed. Then, the start port signal set to OFF is saved in the external information output data area, and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C103 that the start port signal output control timer is not up (step C103; NO), the process branches to step C111 and the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). It is checked whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output ON period depending on whether or not it is.
If it is determined that the start port signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C112; YES), the process proceeds to step C108 to perform processing for setting ON data of the start port signal (step C108), and then A process of saving the start port signal set to ON in the external information output data area (step C109) is performed, and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
If it is determined that the start port signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C112; NO), the process proceeds to step C110 to perform processing for setting the start port signal OFF data, and then proceeds to step C109. A process for saving the start port signal set to OFF in the external information output data area is performed, and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
Next, details of the symbol determination number signal editing process (step C90) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C121, the OFF data of the symbol determination number signal is set, and in step C122, it is determined whether the symbol determination number signal control timer has already timed up or (-1) whether it has timed up after updating. To check. This is because the symbol is determined after a fixed time has elapsed and a signal is output to the outside for the determination of the symbol of the special symbol, and the elapsed time is counted by the timer.
The determination result of step C122 is determined in step C123. If the symbol determination number signal control timer is not up (NO), the process proceeds to step C124, the ON data of the symbol determination number signal is set, and the process proceeds to step C125. . In step C125, the symbol determination number signal (ON data in this case) set in the previous step C124 is saved in the external information output data area and the process returns.

When the routine is repeated and it is determined in step C123 that the symbol determination number signal control timer has timed up (YES), the routine jumps to step C125 and the symbol determination number signal (in this case, OFF data) set in the previous step C121. Is saved in the external information output data area and the process returns.
In this way, the symbol of the special figure is determined after a certain time and is output as external information.

[Command setting processing]
Next, details of each command setting process executed during the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the command setting process, first, a process (step C131) of updating a write counter that defines a buffer writing location is performed. The write counter is updated by (+1) in the range of “0” to “31”.
Subsequently, the command is saved in the command transmission area (MODE) corresponding to the write counter (step C132). This is because the upper one byte command of the two byte commands corresponds to (MODE), so that it is saved.
Thereafter, the command is saved in the command transmission area (ACTION) corresponding to the write counter (step C133). This is because the lower 1 byte command of the 2 byte commands corresponds to (ACTION), so it is saved. After step C133, the process returns.
In this way, the upper 1 byte command of the 2-byte command is saved in the command transmission area (MODE) corresponding to the write counter, and the lower 1 byte command is saved in the command transmission area (ACTION).

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process in steps S367 and S369 of the above-described special figure game process and step B16 of the normal figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C141, it is checked whether or not the fluctuation control flag (read from (A) below) of the target symbol is changing.
Here, the information defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in advance is as follows.
(B) Address of fluctuation control flag area (b) Address of symbol display table (for fluctuation) (c) Address of symbol display table (for stoppage) Information defined on symbol display table (for fluctuation) Is as follows.
(D) Address of variable symbol number area (e) Display data (there are as many as the variable symbol number)
(F) Address of segment area Furthermore, the information defined on the symbol display table (for stopping) is as follows.
(G) Stop symbol number area address (h) Display data (the number of stop symbol numbers)
(Re) Segment area address

The check result of step C141 is determined in step C142, and if it is changing (YES), the process proceeds to step C143, and the symbol display table (for variation) (above (b)) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired. . Next, in step C144, the target variation timer is updated by (-1), and it is checked whether or not the time is up. The check result of step C144 is determined in step C145, and if the time is not up (NO), the process jumps to step C148, and the value of the target variable symbol number area is loaded as a display symbol pointer. Next, in step C151, display data corresponding to the display symbol pointer (above (e), (h)) is acquired, and the process proceeds to subsequent step C152, where the acquired display data is converted into the target segment area (above (f), (Re)) and save the routine.
Therefore, at this time, since the variation timer of the target symbol does not time out, the display data of the symbol corresponding to the symbol number for variation is saved in the target segment area, and the routine is repeated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C145 that the target variation timer has timed up (YES), the process proceeds to step C146, and the symbol variation control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the target variation timer area. Next, after updating the target variable symbol number (above (d)) in step C147, the process proceeds to step C148, where the value of the target variable symbol number area is loaded as a display symbol pointer, and in step C151, the display symbol pointer is loaded. The corresponding display data is acquired, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step C152), and the routine is terminated.
Therefore, at this time, since the variation timer of the target symbol is timed up, the timer initial value is saved, the variation symbol number is updated, and the display data of the symbol is saved in the target segment area.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is not changing but is stopped in step C142 (NO), the process branches to step C149, and the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol (above) (C)), and after loading the value of the target stop symbol number area as the display symbol pointer in step C150, the process proceeds to step C151, and the display data corresponding to the display symbol pointer is acquired and acquired. The display data is saved in the target segment area (step C152), and the routine is terminated.
Therefore, at this time, since the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is stopped from being changed, the symbol display data for stoppage is saved in the target segment area.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process in the latter half variation pattern setting process (step S650) and the distribution process in the variation pattern setting process (step S672) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C161, it is checked whether or not the top data of the target selection table (variation group selection table) is a code without distribution.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group. For example, if there is no need for distribution, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If it is determined that the top data of the selection table is a code without distribution (step C162; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step C168), and the distribution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C162 that the top data of the selection table is not an unsorted code (step C162; NO), after the target variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 2) is loaded as a selection value (Step C163), the first distribution value specified in the selection table is acquired (Step C164).
Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step C164 from the selection value loaded in step C163 (for example, the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2), a new selection value is calculated (step C165), It is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C166).

If it is determined that the new selection value is not smaller than “0” (step C166; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step C167), the process returns to step C164 to repeat the loop. .
That is, in step C164, after the distribution value specified next in the selection table is acquired, the new selection value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value using the new selection value determined in step C166 as the selection value. Calculate (step C165). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C166).
The above process is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step C166 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C166; YES). As a result, one of the latter-half variation pattern groups is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern group defined in the selection table.
If it is determined in step C166 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C166; YES), the process proceeds to step C168, where the data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated. (Step C168), the distribution process is terminated.

In this way, for example, a variation pattern random number 2 (random number for determining a reach variation detailed mode) is used to select a more detailed one from the latter-half variation pattern group distributed by the variation pattern 1. For example, from the normal reach group, select a specific production pattern such as a normal reach pattern that stops by -1 frame from the winning symbol, a -2 frame shift, a +1 frame shift, etc. . This is because the variation time varies depending on the number of frames to which the special map is sent. In addition, for example, when the SP1-A (special 1-A) reach system is used, a pattern in which symbols are normally aligned, or a pattern in which the symbols appear to have shifted once and are changed again (referred to as a so-called relief effect) There are various modes, such as the time of re-variation increases the variation time).
Therefore, by executing this distribution process, if the top data of the selection table is not a code without distribution, a new value is generated based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the selection value related to the determination. By calculating the selection value and repeating the process of determining whether the new selection value is less than the predetermined value “0”, one of the plurality of variation pattern groups is quickly set. To be able to.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step S647) in the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation pattern group of the special figure variation display game from the variation group selection table such as the loss variation pattern selection table or the jackpot variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number 1. .
In particular, this is processing when the size of the random number is 2 bytes, and the 2-byte data includes, for example, “0” to “49999”.
When this routine is started, first, in step C171, it is checked whether or not the top data of the target selection table is an unallocated code.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group. For example, if there is no need for distribution, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If it is determined that the top data in the selection table is a code without sorting (step C172; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step C178), and the 2-byte sorting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C172 that the top data of the selection table is not an unsorted code (step C172; NO), after the target variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 1) is loaded as a selected value (Step C173), the first distribution value specified in the selection table is acquired (Step C174).
Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step C174 from the selection value loaded in Step C173 (for example, the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1), a new selection value is calculated (Step C175). It is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C176).

If it is determined that the new selection value is not smaller than “0” (step C176; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step C177), the process returns to step C174 to repeat the loop. .
That is, in step C174, after the distribution value specified next in the selection table is acquired, the new selection value is subtracted from the new selection value determined in step C176 as the selection value. Calculate (step C175). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C176).
The above processing is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step C176 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C176; YES). As a result, one of the latter-half variation pattern groups is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern group defined in the selection table.
If it is determined in step C176 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C176; YES), the process proceeds to step C178, where the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated. (Step C178) The 2-byte distribution process ends.

Thus, for example, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determination random number) is used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation when the reach state occurs. This relates to the determination of the reach variation mode in the display game, and the above selection table corresponds to a variation group selection table such as a loss variation pattern selection table or a jackpot variation pattern selection table.
The variation group selection tables such as the loss variation pattern selection table and the jackpot variation pattern selection table indicate whether or not the reach state has occurred in the special figure variation display game and the reach of the special figure variation display game in the case where the reach state occurs Depending on the type (reach variation mode), a plurality of types of latter-half variation pattern groups are defined, and the ROM 101B storing the variation group selection table stores the first special diagram and the second special diagram ( As a variation mode of the identification information), a plurality of variation distribution information (second-half variation pattern group) and respective distribution values according to each setting of the reachless variation mode in which no reach state occurs and a plurality of types of reach variation modes They are stored in association with each other in order.
Therefore, by executing this 2-byte distribution process, when the top data of the selection table is not a code without distribution, based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the selection value related to the determination, A new selection value is calculated, and by repeating the process of determining whether or not the new selection value is less than the predetermined value “0”, any one of the plurality of variation pattern groups is quickly selected. To be able to set.

Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Here, “step D” is used as the step number. The special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41. The special drawing in the description of the control processing of the production control device 300 below is the special drawing for production ( This means a decorative pattern that is not a special figure.

[Power-on reset processing]
First, the power-on reset process of the production control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
This power-on reset process starts when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started, the interrupt is first prohibited in step D1, the CPU 311 is initially set in step D2, the VDP 312 is initially set in step D3, and the interrupt is then set in step D4. Then, the main process of step D5 is started. When the main process is started, the main process is executed until the power is turned off (including a power failure).

[Main processing]
Next, the main process (step D5) in the above-described power-on reset process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the main process is started, first, in step D15, the base address of the register of the VDP 312 is set. This is because the address space varies depending on the type of the CPU 311 and its setting, so that the base address is set and various designations are made based on the difference from the address.
Next, display data generation is permitted in step D16. This is a process for permitting the display circuit 608 to access the VRAMs 606 and 607 and generate display data.
Next, a random number seed is set in step D17. This is processing for setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, a srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine is used. Also good.

Next, in step D18, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags) is initialized.
Next, when proceeding to Step D19, Steps D19 to D21 are executed, and the process proceeds to Step D22.
In step D19, random number update processing is executed. This is a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process by using, for example, a rand function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. A random number that is updated by +1 may be used as in the main board (game control apparatus 100).

In step D20, a received command check process is executed. In this method, a command received from the game control apparatus 100 is received by a reception buffer, copied to a command area, and the contents of the command area are read and analyzed.
In step D21, an effect display editing process is executed. This is a process for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in the form of a table, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D28 (instructing screen drawing) to be described later.

In step D22, it is determined whether it is a frame switching timing. If it is a frame switching timing, steps D23 to D32 are sequentially executed. If it is not a frame switching timing, this step D22 is repeated.
Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of a V blank interrupt (also referred to as a V sink interrupt). It is the timing that arrives at a target interval. Subsequent processes (steps D23 to D32 and subsequent steps D19 to D21) are executed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle by the process of step D22. Note that time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effects is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of the processing cycles). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames is 100 ms. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

In step D23, the watchdog timer (WDT) is cleared.
In step D24, it is determined whether or not switch liquid crystal switching data is set. If there is a setting, the process proceeds to step D25 to output switch liquid crystal switching data.
Here, the switch liquid crystal switching data is data indicating whether the switch liquid crystal 702 is turned on or off. If the same data is set, “on” or “off” data exists. say. When the switch liquid crystal 702 is turned on, the parallax barrier 702B is enabled, and when the switch liquid crystal 702 is turned off, the parallax barrier 702B is disabled.
Next, after the switch liquid crystal switching data area is cleared in step D26, the process proceeds to step D27.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D24 that the switch liquid crystal switching data is not set, the process jumps to step D27.
In step D27, if there is a compression / decompression request, a decompression execution is instructed. This is a process of instructing the VDP 312 to reproduce the moving image when the moving image is reproduced because the moving image is compressed and stored in the character ROM (image ROM 322).
In step D28, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.

In step D29, an effect / switch button input process is performed. This is a process of performing editing when the effect button 9 and the switch button 15 are pressed when they are valid. Since the effect button and the switch button 15 are not turned on / off at high speed, the process for detecting the input of the button may be performed within this process, or may be performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown).
In step D30, a sound control process is executed. This is to analyze a control command (8-bit data signal) from the game control device 100, instruct the reproduced sound to the sound source LSI, and drive the speakers 12a and 12b to produce a sound effect or the like. is there.
In step D31, a decoration control process for controlling various LEDs and the like is executed.
In step D32, motor / SOL control processing for controlling various motors and SOL (solenoid) is executed.
In addition, although the control processing of steps D30 to D32 is performed in these steps in which operation switching is performed in units of processing cycles in order to match the presentation of the screen, signals generated or set by these control processing The process of actually outputting data (especially signals for controlling driving of various LEDs and motors) to the port is performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Direction / Switch button input processing]
Next, the effect / switch button input process executed in step D29 of the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, if the effect button invalid timer is not “0” in step D41, −1 is updated (decremented). Since the effect button 9 is effective except for the effect button invalid period, if the effect button 9 is pressed several times in a short time with the operation of the switching button 15, it is excessive due to the effect change setting in the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. Since a load is applied, an effect button invalid timer (set in step D60 described later) is provided to invalidate the operation of the effect button 9 until the display mode of the effect is stabilized. For this purpose, an effect button invalid timer is counted in step D41.

Next, it is determined in step D42 whether or not the effect button invalid timer has become “0”. If it is not “0”, the process branches to step D43 to set an invalid flag in the effect button flag area, and in step D44. After all the control areas of the effect buttons are set to the no-input state, the process proceeds to step D46. Thereby, during the count period of the effect button invalid timer, even if the effect button 9 is operated, it becomes invalid, and the display mode of the effect is stabilized.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step D42 that the effect button invalid timer has become “0”, the process proceeds to step D45, and the value of the effect button flag setting area is copied to the effect button flag area. Here, the effect button invalid timer becomes “0” and the invalid time for invalidating the effect button 9 has elapsed, and therefore the value that the effect button flag is valid (that is, the valid flag) is set in the effect button flag setting area. Since it is set, it is copied to the effect button flag area. When the production button flag is valid, it may be simply referred to as a valid flag, and when the production button flag is invalid, it may be simply referred to as an invalid flag.
When the effect button 9 is automatically enabled / disabled while the game is in progress, the effect button flag is set in the effect button flag setting area. Even if the effect button flag is valid in the progress of the game, if the 2D display / 3D display is switched by the operation of the switch button 15, the effect button 9 is invalidated for a certain period of time. Are used properly.

Next, the process proceeds to step D46 to determine whether or not the effect button is valid. This determination is made by looking at the flag in the effect button flag area. When the process proceeds to step D46 through the process of step D45, since the value (effective flag) that the effect button flag is valid is copied in the effect button flag area, it is determined that the effect button is valid. When the process proceeds to step D46 through the process, the invalidation flag remains set in the production button flag area, and therefore the production button is determined to be invalid.
If it is determined in step D46 that the effect button is valid, the process proceeds to step D47, and the value of the current effect button state area is copied to the previous effect button state area. This saves the previous status.
Next, in step D48, the port state data of the effect button 9 is copied to the current effect button state area. Thereby, the state of the effect button 9 is fetched from the port state data of the effect button 9 this time, and the effect button ON or OFF is copied to the current effect button state area. Next, in step D49, the state change data of the effect button 9 is generated and saved in the effect button rising edge area. That is, the rising edge state indicating whether or not the effect button 9 has been changed from OFF to ON is captured.
In summary, the value copied in step D47 (the value of the current effect button state area) is the previous state of the effect button 9, and this state (port state data of the effect button 9) acquired in step D48. And the rising edge state (whether it has changed from OFF to ON) is saved in step D49. Thereby, the state of whether the effect button 9 is pressed or not is stored.

After step D49, the process proceeds to step D50. If the switching button invalid timer is not “0”, −1 is updated (decremented). Since the switch button 15 is basically always valid, the valid / invalid flag like the effect button 9 is not provided.
If there is a situation where it is difficult for the player to switch 2D display / 3D display by arbitrarily pressing the switch button 15 during the progress of the game, an invalid timer may be set to deal with the situation. Alternatively, the same processing configuration may be provided by providing a flag similar to that of the effect button 9.
However, if the switch button 15 is operated to switch the 2D display / 3D display continuously in a short time, the effect display is not stable. Therefore, a switch button invalid timer is provided to stabilize the effect display. For this purpose, the switching button invalid timer is counted in step D50.

In step D51, it is determined whether the switching button invalid timer has become “0”. If not, the routine is terminated and the process returns. Then, the routine is repeated, and when the switching button invalid timer becomes “0”, the process proceeds to step D52, and the value of the current switching button state area is copied to the previous switching button state area. This saves the previous status.
Next, in step D53, the port status data of the switching button 15 is copied to the current switching button status area. As a result, the current state of the switching button 15 is captured from the port state data of the switching button 15 so that the operation status of the switching button 15 is copied to the current switching button state area. Next, in step D54, the state change data of the switching button 15 is generated and saved in the rising edge region of the switching button. That is, a rising edge state indicating whether the switch button 15 has been turned on from OFF is captured.
In summary, the value copied in step D52 (the value of the current switching button state area) is the previous state of the switching button 15, and this state acquired in step D53 (the port state data of the switching button 15). And the rising edge state (whether it has changed from OFF to ON) is saved in step D54. Thereby, the state of whether the switch button 15 is pressed or not is stored.

Next, at step D55, it is determined whether or not the rising edge of the operation of the switching button 15 is ON. If not, the routine is terminated and the process returns. Then, the routine is repeated, and if it is determined in step D55 that the rising edge of the operation of the switching button 15 is ON, the process proceeds to step D56, and the user selection display mode is switched between 2D display and 3D display. The user selection display mode is a display mode in which the player selects by operating the switching button 15 and is either the 2D display mode or the 3D display mode. The 2D display mode is a mode in which the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 is disabled and a presentation is performed in 2D display. The 3D display mode is a 3D display in which the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 is enabled. It is a mode that can be. However, even in the 3D display mode, 2D display or 3D display may be performed depending on the effect (for example, 2D display is performed from the start of fluctuation of the special figure to reach, and 3D display is performed after reach).
Accordingly, when the mode after switching by the switching button 15 is the 2D display mode, the switch liquid crystal 702 is immediately turned off to disable the parallax barrier 702B. However, in the 3D display mode, the switch liquid crystal 702 is immediately turned on. It is not necessary to enable the parallax barrier 702B. For this reason, in step D57 described later, it is determined whether or not the mode after switching is 2D.
It should be noted that a mode display may be performed to inform the player who is the user whether the screen mode of the display device 41 is 2D display or 3D display (for example, see FIG. 115 described later). . For the mode display, for example, the display mode may be displayed at one corner of the screen of the display device 41, or a dedicated LED may be provided to notify the mode display. However, the mode display is not limited to these examples, and other display methods may be used. Good.

Next, in step D57, it is determined whether or not the mode after the operation of the switching button 15 (mode after switching) is 2D display. If it is 2D display, the process proceeds to step D58 to switch to the 2D display side. Set LCD switching data. Here, since data is set on the 2D display side, the parallax barrier 702B is invalidated when the switch liquid crystal 702 is turned off, and off is set as the switch liquid crystal switching data.
Here, for example, the setting contents when switching the display mode when the display mode is switched between 2D display and 3D display include the following.
(B) Setting of output data for switch LCD switching data (used in main processing)
As described above, the switch liquid crystal switching data is only “ON, OFF”.
(B) Setting of invalid timer of switching button 15 (to prevent continuous switching)
(C) Setting of the invalid timer of the effect button 9 (the display mode is set so as not to apply a load to the main control microcomputer 311 (CPU) of the effect control device 300 due to the effect change setting when pressed when the display mode is switched). To disable until stable)
(D) Setting of LED lighting data that clearly indicates the 2D / 3D display mode (in the case of a configuration in which a dedicated LED is provided as described above)

After step D58, next, in step D59, an invalid timer (switch button invalid timer) of the switch button 15 is set to 1 second, for example. Next, in step D60, an invalid timer (effect button invalid timer) for the effect button 9 is set to 0.5 seconds, for example. After step D60, the process returns.
On the other hand, when the mode after the operation of the switching button 15 (the mode after switching) is not 2D display in step D57, that is, when 3D display is performed, step D58 is jumped and the process proceeds to step D59. Therefore, at this time, the switch liquid crystal switching data to the 2D display side is not set.

[Direction display editing process]
Next, the effect display editing process executed in step D21 of the main process will be described with reference to FIG. As described in the main process, this effect display editing process is a process for setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D28 (instructing screen drawing) of the main process.
When this routine is started, steps D101 to D118 are sequentially executed, and thereafter, processing according to the presence / absence of a display mode change request is executed in steps D119 to D122, and the process returns.

In step D101, a customer waiting display editing process is executed. In the customer waiting display editing process, as long as the customer waiting display is being controlled (during customer waiting demonstration), the “stop symbol display state” (customer waiting A) and “demo display state by movie playback” (customer waiting B) These are executed alternately for a predetermined customer waiting demonstration execution time.
In step D102, initial setting of the drawing area is executed.
In step D103, background editing processing is executed. This is for editing the background image.
In step D104, background preview editing processing is executed. In the background preview editing process, the display setting of the preview character displayed at the position in front of the background and behind the special drawing is performed. In other words, the preview that is performed in the background is edited.
In step D105, a symbol editing process is executed. Here, a process of editing a symbol is performed based on the symbol variation table.

In step D106, the preview editing process 1 is executed. In the preview editing process 1, the display setting of the preview character displayed at the position on the front surface of the special drawing and the rear surface of the hold display is performed.
In step D107, a pending editing process is executed. Here, the special figure 1 hold display editing process for executing the start memory hold display in FIG. 1 and the special figure 2 hold display editing process for executing the start memory hold display in FIG. 2 are performed.
In step D108, the preview editing process 2 is executed. In the preview editing process 2, the display setting of the preview character displayed at the position on the front side of the hold display and the rear side of the reduced symbol or the fourth symbol is performed. Although it is an effect display pushed out to the front to make it stand out as a notice, it is behind the reduced symbol and the 4th symbol, so that the player can see the symbol while performing this effect Has been.

In step D109, a reduced symbol editing process is executed. Note that the reduced symbol is a decorative symbol (for example, a normal symbol that is reduced in size) that is displayed in a small size to clearly indicate that the image is changing at the corner of the screen of the display device 41 during a movie effect during reach. And there are left, middle and right symbols). This routine is a process for variably displaying the reduced symbols.
In step D110, the fourth symbol editing process is executed. The 4th symbol is a decorative symbol (in a different form from a normal symbol) that is displayed in a small size and changed in order to clearly indicate that it is changing on the screen edge of the display device 41 at the time of movie production. In this example, there is a pair of upper and lower symbols for Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 (that is, Special Fig. 1 on the 4th symbol, Special Fig. 1 on the 4th symbol, Special Fig. 2 on the 4th symbol, Special Fig. 2 on the 4th. There is a pattern below).
In step D111, a big hit round editing process is executed. This routine is a process for a big hit effect including a big hit fanfare, an interval, and an ending effect in addition to the big hit round. Further, the processing of this routine is processing for controlling the time value and the like of each scene rather than editing what is to be drawn. Even during the same round, there is a flow of effects such as displaying a message or playing an animation, and this is a process for controlling this flow. The data that needs to be set varies depending on the contents of the effect. If the effect is a big hit, there are a moving image change instruction, a sound change instruction, and the like, and this routine controls the flow.

In step D112, a drawing end declaration is executed. The drawing end declaration is a process for outputting information indicating that various editing processes for one frame have been completed to the VDP 312. As a result, the VDP 312 reports that various editing processes for one frame have been completed.
In step D113, the top address of the left symbol control area is set.
In step D114, the fluctuation parameter update process is executed based on the set head address.
In step D115, the head address of the medium symbol control area is set.
In step D116, the variable parameter update process is executed based on the set head address.
In step D117, the head address of the right symbol control area is set.
In step D118, the variable parameter update process is executed based on the set head address.

Here, the editing process from the background editing process to the fourth symbol editing process in steps D103 to D110 is a process for setting a command group for instructing the VDP 312 to display characters and the like to be displayed on the screen of the display device 41. Then, processing is performed earlier as the depth is displayed on the screen. This is because drawing commands are transmitted to the VDP 312 in the order of the set commands. For example, since the 4th symbol and the like must not disappear during the change, the process is performed at the end in order to display it on the foreground. Even if there is a notice effect, there are those that are performed in front of the symbol and those that are performed in the back, so there are notice editing processes in several places.
In general, a “character” means a character or character having a property or character, or a character or character, and a computer term may mean a character. However, in the present application, particularly in the description of image display control using VDP, a series of still images or moving images such as a series of movies, background images, design images, and characters images are referred to as characters. Image data (still image data or moving image data) may be referred to as character data.

  In the case of such a flowchart, since it is necessary to provide the editing process for all theoretical layers, the number of editing processes varies depending on the model. However, it is not limited to such a configuration (a configuration in which the drawing priority is determined by the processing order). For example, there is a method of controlling the processing order to be changed according to the effect at that time. In addition, the processing order is irrelevant when using the function of setting the drawing priority for each character.

After step D118, the process proceeds to step D119 to determine whether or not the display mode change request flag = 0.
Here, the display mode change request is determined in accordance with a parameter of display m (display mode) which is one of the notice effects, as shown in a notice operation table 1A of FIG. The parameter m is a parameter for designating whether the display mode is the 2D display section or the 3D display section when the user selection display mode is 3D display, and corresponds to the internal display mode. The contents of the parameter of the display m are as follows.
“0”: No change request “1”: 2D display start request “2”: 3D display start request “3”: Gasset 3D display start request (2D display when switch liquid crystal is on)

Here, the setting of the display mode change request flag will be described. This display mode change request flag uses the display mode change request flag area in common in various editing processes prior to step D119, and sets the display mode change request flag as a display mode change request flag. On the other hand, this flag is set in a process in which a change request is made.
Therefore, the internal display mode flag is not determined during each editing process, and is determined by setting (setting) in step D120 described later. This is because, if the internal display mode flag is set in each editing process, the process before the set process has already been completed, and the correspondence of the entire game will be shifted. Is decided. In addition, by setting the internal display mode flag at the end of a series of processes (each editing process) in this way, it becomes possible to respond without causing a shift in the response of the entire game from the effect display editing process of the next routine. .

If the display mode change request flag = 0 in step D119, it is determined that there is no display mode change request and the routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the display mode change request flag is not “0” in step D119, the process proceeds to step D120, and an internal display mode flag corresponding to the display mode change request flag is set.
The internal display mode flag is a flag corresponding to the above-described internal display mode. Therefore, for example, if the display mode change request flag is “1”, the internal display mode flag = “1” is set, and if the display mode change request flag is “2”, the internal display mode flag = “2”. If the display mode change request flag is set to “3”, the internal display mode flag = “3” is set.

In step D121, switch liquid crystal switching data corresponding to the internal display mode is set. The switch liquid crystal 702 controls the parallax barrier 702B to switch the screen of the liquid crystal display 701 to a three-dimensional displayable state or a flat display state, and is controlled as follows in relation to the internal display mode. .
Internal display mode = “0”: No change in parallax barrier control of switch liquid crystal Internal display mode = “1”: 2D display start request: Turn off parallax barrier of switch liquid crystal Internal display mode = “2”: 3D display start request : Turn on the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal Internal display mode = “3”: Request to start the 3D display of the screen: 2D display while turning on the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal Next, in step D122, the display mode change request flag is cleared. This is to clear the flag because the processing corresponding to the display mode change request flag has been completed in steps D119 to D121. After step D122, the process returns.

[Background preview editing process]
Next, the details of the background preview editing process executed in step D104 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In this routine, the display setting of the notice character displayed at the position which is the front surface of the background and the rear surface of the special drawing is performed. In other words, the preview that is performed in the background is edited.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D131 whether the background preview display control is in progress. If so (ie, if the background notice effect is being executed), the address of the background notice information area is set in step D132, and the process proceeds to step D133.

  Here, the background notice information area is the background notice data (for example, in the notice control table) used for the background notice display when the random number lottery or the notice effect setting is set in the received command check process (step D20) in the main process described above. This is an area in which address information for designating a line) is set. Here, in principle, the background notice data is defined in the scenario table of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the command from the main board and the detailed fluctuation table of the left, middle and right symbols, and linked to the movement of the special figure. It is configured to be written in the background notice information area at the timing. Although there are a plurality of types of notice effects that are performed at a certain timing, the notice data value determined by random number lottery is used to perform effects that have been selected in advance.

Proceeding to step D133, it is determined whether or not the background notice data is set in the background notice information area. If there is a background notice data setting, steps D134 and D135 are sequentially executed based on the background notice data, and the process returns. If the background notice data is not set, the process returns without executing steps D134 and D135.
In step D134, a notice information update determination process (described later) is executed. In step D135, a preview display data editing process (described later) is executed.

[Preliminary information update judgment processing]
Next, details of the advance notice information update determination process executed in step D134 in the background advance notice editing process will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D141, the data of the notice control table pointer indicated by the background notice data input to the notice control area (corresponding to the background notice information area in step D132) is loaded, and the process proceeds to step D142. .

Here, the notice control table pointer data is an address (for example, a head address) in which table-like control data for controlling the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as the notice control table) is stored. That is, when the data of the notice control table pointer is determined, one of a plurality of notice control tables is determined (selected) corresponding to this data, and a specific position (row) in the notice control table is designated. Will be. The pointer means a storage area of a RAM (RAM 311a in this example) in which data of an address such as a table address is stored. Control data such as a notice control table is stored in a ROM (PROM 321 in this example). The notice control table pointer stores the address of the storage area of the ROM in which the notice control table data is stored.
In the notice control table, various data types (for example, an image pattern table address for designating a character type, a coordinate table address for designating a character display position, and a character transparency are designated. A plurality of pieces of data (data such as parameters and table addresses) are set in the order of progress for each data type, and the presentation is performed by appropriately referring to these data in the order of progress. If the data set in the notice control table is a table address (information indicating a storage area in which the table data is stored), the data further corresponds to the area indicated by the data (that is, the address) of the table address. There is a type of control data table (for example, a coordinate table, an image pattern table, a transmission table), and effects are performed with reference to the control data table. Also, a plurality of different advance notice control tables are registered in advance, and any of the advance notice control tables is appropriately selected and used for the type of effect and each section (scenario) during the effect. At that time, which notice control table is used is designated by the notice control table pointer data (that is, data stored in a storage area called the notice control table pointer). Hereinafter, for example, the description “designated by the notice control table pointer” means that the data of the notice control table pointer designates in detail.
Note that the pointer for designating the image pattern table is the pointer for designating the image pattern table, the pointer for designating the coordinate table is the pointer for designating the coordinate table. There is a transparency control pointer as a pointer for designating a table.

In step D142, it is determined in the notice control table designated by the notice control table pointer loaded in step D141 whether the notice status is continuation of notice control, and if not notice control is continued, the process proceeds to step D156 to continue notice control. If so, the process proceeds to step D143.
In step D143, it is determined whether the value of the notice display start delay timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the value of the notice display start delay timer is updated by 1 in step D144, and then the process proceeds to step D145. If not greater than 0 (less than 0), the process proceeds to step D146.
In step D145, it is determined whether the notice display start delay timer has timed up (whether the value has reached 0). If the time has expired, a sound number corresponding to the effect is set in the notice sound area in step D146, and the process returns. If the time is not up, the process proceeds to step D147.

  When it is desired to reflect the notice effect from the reference time, a notice display start delay timer is set (in this example, set in step D165 described later). When the delay timer is not set (when it is 0), the performance is performed according to the reference time. For example, the timing at which the production is performed, such as the first stage of the step-up notice, is basically determined for each model. This is to prevent the interest from deteriorating because it cannot be predicted at the timing of being scattered every time. However, even in the same SU1 (step-up 1) production, the type of character that appears by the distribution is changed and the reliability is changed to enhance the fun of the game. It is considered that there are many cases where it is desired to change the time. In such a case, according to the above notice display start delay timer, the start time of the effect can be finely adjusted and the timing of the end of the effect can be adjusted. .

  Step D146 is a process for starting to sound at the notice start timing. In the case of proceeding to Step D146, since the notice display start delay timer has timed up, the notice effect is started, but this is a process for starting to sound at the start timing. However, depending on the type of advance notice, there is a case where no sound output is requested, and in this case, the process of step D146 is skipped.

In step D147, it is determined whether the value of the display frame counter is 0 or more. If it is 0 or more, steps D148 and D149 are sequentially executed, and the process proceeds to step D150.
Here, the display frame counter will be described. There is a scenario even during one notice effect, and it is necessary to set a time value for each section of the notice effect. The display frame counter is a counter that counts the remaining time of the time value of each section. While the value of the display frame counter is 0 or more (that is, while there is the remaining time), it is necessary to update the character type, display coordinates, etc. every frame, and the processing for this is performed after step D148. It is processing.

In step D148, if the currently executed notice effect does not reach the final data, the image pattern control pointer is updated by 1 (that is, switching to the next data arranged in the order of progress in the notice control table described above, and so on) (The same applies to the control pointer of the above).
In step D149, if the notice effect currently being executed has not reached the final data, an update for increasing the coordinate control pointer by 1 is executed.
When the process proceeds to step D150, it is determined whether there is a transparent table (table-shaped transparent data) setting in the currently executed notice effect. If there is a transparent table setting, the process proceeds to step D151, and if there is no transparent table setting. Proceed to step D152.

When the process proceeds to step D151, if the notice effect currently being executed has not reached the final data, the transmission control pointer is updated by 1, and the process proceeds to step D152.
In step D152, it is determined whether the value of the display frame counter is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, update is performed to decrease the value of the display frame counter by 1 in step D153, and then the process proceeds to step D154. Proceed to step D154 without executing step D153.

  In step D154, it is determined whether the value of the display frame counter is 0. If it is 0, in step D155, the update of the notice control table pointer is incremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step D156. . Here, when the display frame counter = 0, the notice control table pointer is updated to shift to the next scenario. The flow of the scenario is defined in the notice control table, and the position (row) in the notice control table designated by the notice control table pointer is switched to the following by updating the value of the notice control table pointer by one.

In step D156, it is determined whether the notice status is initialized. If it is not initialized, the process proceeds to step D159. If it is initialized, steps D157 and D158 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D165.
In step D157, an update to increase the notice control table pointer by 1 is executed.
In step D158, the value of the previous notice control table pointer is set as a table pointer return value.
In step D159, it is determined whether the notice status is normal update. If it is not normal update, the process proceeds to step D160. If normal update, the process proceeds to step D165.

When it proceeds to step D160, it is determined whether or not the notice status returns to the return position. If it does not return to the return position, the process proceeds to step D162, and if it returns to the return position, the process proceeds to step D165 after executing step D161.
In step D161, the control table pointer return value (the table pointer return value set in step D158) is set as the value of the notice control table pointer.

In step D162, it is determined whether or not the notice status is the notice effect end. If the notice effect is not finished, the process proceeds to step D165. Proceed to D165. When NULL is set in the notice control table pointer, execution of the notice effect ends.
In step D165, a notice display start delay timer is set. Next, in step D166, a notice display frame counter (the aforementioned display frame counter) is set, and then, the process proceeds to step D167.

  In step D167, it is determined whether the value of the notice display start delay timer is 0. If not, the process proceeds to step D169. If it is 0, the corresponding audio output request is set in step D168, and the process proceeds to step D169. This is a process for immediately starting to sound when the delay timer = 0, since the notice effect is immediately started. Depending on the type of notice, a configuration may be adopted in which no sound output is required.

In step D169, it is determined whether the image display mode designation is “0”.
The contents of the image display mode designation are as follows.
“0”: No change request “1”: 2D display start request “2”: 3D display start request “3”: Gasset 3D display start request (2D display when switch liquid crystal is on)
If the image display mode designation is “0” in step D169, step D170 is removed and the process proceeds to step D171. On the other hand, if the image display mode designation is not “0” in step D169, the process proceeds to step D170, the current image display mode designation value is set in the display mode change request flag area, and then the process proceeds to step D171.
As described above, the display mode change request flag is commonly used in the various edit processes prior to step D118 in the process in which the display mode change request flag area is commonly used and the display mode change request flag is requested to be changed. Since the flag is set, the current image display mode designation value is set as the display mode change request flag in the process of step D170.

  In step D171, an image pattern control pointer is set. Next, in step D172, a coordinate control pointer is set. Next, in step D173, a transmission control pointer is set, and then the process returns. Here, since a new effect (including scenario continuation) is performed, it is necessary to specify a new control data table corresponding to the effect. These steps D171 to D173 are processes for setting the head address of the new control data table.

[Preliminary display data editing processing]
Next, details of the notice display data editing process executed in step D135 in the background notice editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
This routine is a process of creating a drawing instruction command (command for VDP 312) of a notice effect character (including a movie, etc., indicating an image stored in a character ROM (image ROM 322)).
Note that image data is set in the same manner for processes other than the notice effect, but the details of the notice display data editing process are shown in FIG. 100 as a representative example. Should be set.
When this routine is started, first, in step D201, it is determined whether the value of the notice display start delay timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the process returns. If not, the process returns. Proceed to step D202.

In step D202, it is determined whether the data in the image pattern table designated by the image pattern control pointer is NULL (no setting). If it is NULL, the process returns. If it is not NULL, steps D203 to D206 are sequentially executed. Proceed to step D207.
In step D203, the image ID of the image for the left eye is acquired from the image pattern table. The image ID is a management number for identifying a plurality of image data.
The image pattern table is stored in an area (for example, PROM 321) for storing 2D / 3D effect information. For example, information on many image patterns is stored as data, and the image data is an image ID. Can be specified.
Next, in step D204, the width and height data of the image for the left eye is acquired from the image pattern table. That is, among the various parameters of the left eye image (character data), the width and height data are obtained from the image pattern table.
In step D205, the coordinate data of the image data is acquired from the coordinate table specified by the coordinate control pointer.
In step D206, transmission data without transmission is set. The transparency data is set in step D208, which will be described later, as necessary. Here, no transparency is set as the default value of the transparency data.

In step D207, it is determined whether the data of the transparency table designated by the transparency control pointer is NULL (no setting). If it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D209. If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D209 after executing step D208. .
In step D208, the transmission data (the data once set to be non-transparent in step D206) is replaced with data corresponding to the transmission table (there may be no transmission).

When the processing proceeds to step D209, the processing from step D209 to step D213 is sequentially executed, and then the processing proceeds to step D214.
In step D209, an instruction is given to load image data (character data) corresponding to the parameter acquired in step D204 into the VRAM.
In step D210, the attributes (number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of the image data are set according to the parameters acquired in step D204 and the coordinate data acquired in step D205.
In step D211, the transmission parameters of the image data (whether or not to perform transmission control to make a transparent image, the degree of transparency, etc.) are set according to the transmission data.
In step D212, the image data rendering effect (transparency setting, depth information, etc.) is set.
In step D213, the sprite is pasted into the virtual drawing space. This is a process for displaying the image (character) by so-called sprite drawing.

After step D213, the process proceeds to step D214 and subsequent steps, and the right eye image is edited for 3D display.
That is, it is determined in step D214 whether or not the user selection display mode is 3D display. If the user selection display mode is not 3D display, the process jumps to step D218. If the user selection display mode is 3D display, it is determined in step D215 whether the internal display mode is 3D display. If the internal display mode is not 3D display, the process jumps to step D218. If the internal display mode is 3D display, the process proceeds to step D216 to set the image ID for the right-eye image. The setting of the image ID for the right eye image is acquired from the image pattern table in the same manner as in step D203.
Here, the determination is divided into the user selection display mode and the internal display mode for the following reason.
That is, even if the display mode selected by the user by the operation of the switch button 15 is in the state of 3D display, there are 3D display sections and 2D display sections as images depending on the progress of the production. This is because the determination is divided into two modes called display modes.
Regarding the determination of the internal display mode, for example, a table (for example, symbol variation table) that controls the effect of 2D display or 3D display is provided with a parameter that specifies the internal display state corresponding to the internal display mode. It may be configured to make a determination based on a parameter.

Next, in step D217, the right-eye image data is set based on the image ID, the load of the image data (character data) to the VRAM is instructed, and then the process proceeds to step D218.
Note that right eye image data is set through the processing of step D216 and step D217, but if not, the left eye image used in steps D203 to D209 is reused. The setting of the image ID for the right eye image may be obtained by calculation or may be obtained from an image pattern table.
Also, only when a new right-eye image is set, a load instruction in step D217 is performed. On the other hand, when the right-eye image is set by reusing the left-eye image, the left-eye image is already loaded into the VRAM in step D209, and is thus reused.

  In step D218, the x coordinate is updated to the value of the right eye image. This is because the left-eye and right-eye images have the same size and y-coordinate, so if only the x-coordinate of the left-eye image is shifted to the right-eye position, a right-eye image can be created, and the processing is performed. It is. For example, if the x coordinate is incremented by 1 (shifted to the right side), the x coordinate position is exactly overlapped with the right eye image. Note that the present invention is not limited to this method. For example, right-eye x-coordinate data may be acquired from a table to create a right-eye image.

Here, the image data at the time of 3D display and the image data at the time of 2D display will be described as follows.
In the case of 3D display, image data for the left eye and image data for the right eye are required separately, and the address of the image data in that case is based on the upper left of the screen, and the address starts from there. With the upper left of the screen in the image data as a reference, this is set as the start point of the address. The reference point at the upper left of the screen in the image data for the right eye is set to a point shifted to the right by a predetermined amount from the reference point at the upper left of the screen in the image data for the left eye. The address of the image data is expanded.
Therefore, the address of the image data for the right eye can be created by shifting the address of the image data for the left eye (in particular, the x coordinate) to the position for the right eye. The process in step D218 is based on this technique.
On the other hand, in the case of 2D display, the image data for the left eye and the image data for the right eye are the same, but instead of setting the image data for 2D display independently, “image data for the left eye” for 3D display. "Only" enables 2D display. Specifically, the image data for the left eye for 3D display is set to the position for the left eye for 2D display to create image data for the left eye for 2D display, and then for the left eye set for 2D display. The image data is shifted to the position for the right eye and 2D display image data for the right eye is created. In this way, image data for 2D display is set.
Incidentally, if new image data for 2D display is prepared, it is not efficient because it is necessary to increase the ROM capacity (for example, the capacity of the image ROM 322). However, as in this embodiment, the “left-eye image” is used. If the left and right image data for 2D display are set using “data only”, the ROM capacity does not increase.

From the above, the left-eye image data and the right-eye image data are set in this order, but the address of the image data is based on the upper left of the screen, and the address starts from there. It is set from the image data for use.
Then, after setting the image data for the left eye, the image data for the right eye is set by shifting the address of the image data for the left eye after the setting to the position for the right eye. This is simple because the image data for the right eye can be set simply by shifting the image data for the left eye to the position for the right eye.
Also, since the address (especially x coordinate) of the image data for the left eye is simply shifted to the position for the right eye, the image data for the left eye can be used in place of the image data for the right eye, and a new image for the right eye is newly created. Save time and effort to create data.

After step D218, the following processes of step D219 to step D222 are performed.
In step D219, attributes (number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of the image data for the right eye are set.
In step D220, according to the transmission data, the transmission parameters of the right-eye image data (whether or not to perform transmission control to make a transparent image, the degree of transparency, etc.) are set.
In step D221, a drawing effect (transparency setting, depth information, etc.) for the image data for the right eye is set.
In step D222, the sprite is pasted into the virtual drawing space. This is a process for displaying an image (character) by so-called sprite drawing. After step D222, the process returns.

By executing each program as described above, a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 that has received the command displays the display device 41 based on the program (FIGS. 93 to 100). A variable display game is executed including movie effects, 2D display, and 3D display.
Specifically, during a game of the pachinko machine 1, when a game ball wins a special drawing start winning opening 25 or 26 (that is, when there is a special drawing start winning), a command for instructing a variation effect of the special figure Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a special figure (decorative special figure) is displayed on the display unit 41a. If the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, a big hit occurs. In case of detachment, it stops at the detachment symbol.
Here, among the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is a command that does not start the effect alone and exerts an effect in pairs. Command + designation command ”. In the following description, “symbol design command” may be described as “symbol command” as appropriate.

When the variation pattern command and the symbol command are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 based on the start winning of the special figure, the effect control device 300 produces the special figure effect based on the transmitted command. Take control.
Note that the variation pattern command and the symbol command correspond to a first command and a second command that exert an effect in a set, respectively.
Further, when the start opening SW is turned on during the change of the symbol and the start memory is generated, the information indicating that the special figure hold number = “1” is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and the prefetch command and the special figure hold number are displayed. A command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.
If reception of multiple commands (for example, “variation pattern command + symbol designation command”) is normal, that is, the variation pattern command sent first and the symbol designation command sent later are normally received. Then, it is determined that the command to be set has been established, and the effect of symbol variation is performed on the display device 41 by the effect control device 300 based on the command to be set.

Here, the types and contents of commands that form a set will be described.
There are the following commands as a set, which will be described separately for each performance.
(1) Symbol variation This is transmitted at the start of variation, and a set is formed by “variation pattern command” + “stop symbol command”. The “stop symbol command” is abbreviated as a symbol command as appropriate.
(2) Effect during the big hit For this, a set is formed by “effect screen command” + “hit symbol command” according to the effect section.
The production screen commands include the following.
(A) Fanfare start = Fanfare command (b) Start of each round = Round command corresponding to the number of rounds (c) Interval start = Interval command (d) Ending start = Ending command "Stop symbol command" = "Big hit symbol command".
Here, as described above, a combination of two commands of “variation pattern command” + “stop symbol command” is effective in a plurality of commands that form a pair. The present invention can be applied even if the effect is exhibited in a form in which three or more are combined.
The “stop command” is a command for instructing to stop a symbol such as during fluctuation, but this is a single command and does not constitute a set.

Next, the rendering operation including 2D display and 3D display in the variable display game by the display device 41 will be specifically described.
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the 3D display method in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 101, the display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display 701, a switch liquid crystal 702, and a backlight 703, and enables 3D display. This is a parallax barrier method, and enables 3D display (display) with the naked eye.
The autostereoscopic 3D display is designed to display different images on the right and left eyes on a single screen by superimposing a plate-shaped lens called lenticular lens and a vertical stripe filter (aperture grill) called parallax barrier on a normal display. It is.
In the parallax barrier method, the left-eye image and the right-eye image are alternately displayed on the screen, and when viewed through the parallax barrier, only the left-eye image is displayed on the left eye and only the right-eye image is displayed on the right eye. (Ie, by displaying an image obtained by adding the right-eye image and the left-eye image on the liquid crystal display 710 as a 3D display image), the two images are synthesized in the human head. Thus, the image becomes three-dimensional (3D).

In addition, one pixel on the liquid crystal display 701 is composed of light emitters (subpixels) of the three primary colors (red, green, and blue) of light, and a parallax barrier 702B corresponding to the subpixel is the switch liquid crystal 702 It is provided inside. Then, the switch liquid crystal 702 controls the parallax barrier 702B to be valid / invalid based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311, whereby the screen of the liquid crystal display 701 operates as 3D display or 2D display.
Specifically, it operates as follows.
(A) At the time of 3D display: the parallax barrier 702B is effective. By effectively controlling the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702, the parallax barrier 702B operates so as to block light and separate light corresponding to the left and right eyes. (See FIG. 101). As a result, different lights reach the left and right eyes. If the left-eye image and the right-eye image are displayed in correspondence with the parallax barrier 702B, the image can be seen three-dimensionally.
(B) During 2D display: the parallax barrier 702B is disabled so that the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 is disabled so that the parallax barrier 702B becomes transparent and transmits light so that the same light reaches the left and right eyes. Operate. As a result, the same light reaches the left and right eyes, which is the same as a normal 2D display. That is, the image looks planar.
Note that the method in which the parallax barrier is always present is a structure in which light passes through the parallax barrier and an image is viewed even in 2D display, and thus the screen is not slightly clear.

<Background explanation>
Next, the problem of 3D display as the background of the present invention will be described.
The 3D display has the following general problems.
・ 3D display gets tired when watching for a long time.
・ 3D display differs in how people see and get tired.
In the glasses-type 3D display, there is a problem of loss of glasses or a storage place, and there is a troublesomeness of wearing glasses.
-In the naked-eye 3D display, there is a restriction on the position (eye position) at which 3D can be seen.
-In the 3D display other than the time division method, the resolution is halved and the characteristic is dark.
-The 3D display method using a lenticular lens or the like has an uncomfortable appearance (for example, the resolution of the screen is reduced) (It may be solved by making the screen high-definition, but there are problems with cost and control)
-Data for right eye and left eye are required for 3D display.
-3D display is generally expensive.

Next, as a study subject when using 3D display for the display device of the gaming machine, there is the following.
・ A game may be played for a long time, and if you watch it for a long time, it may get tired.
Therefore, in this embodiment, 2D / 3D switching is appropriately performed, and 2D / 3D switching is also possible manually.
-The glasses-type 3D system has problems such as loss of glasses and a storage space, and troublesome wearing glasses.
Thus, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that both 2D / 3D display can be performed with a certain quality while the 3D system is a naked eye type.
The detailed effects of the present embodiment on the above general problem and examination problem will be described in detail later.

Next, an outline of 2D / 3D switching control in this embodiment will be described in advance.
<Switching mode of 2D display / 3D display>
(1) Switching the parallax barrier The parallax barrier 702B can be switched between valid and invalid by controlling the switch liquid crystal 702.
However, the switch liquid crystal 702 does not perform 2D / 3D display switching, but simply switches between enabling / disabling of the parallax barrier 702B. For example, even when the parallax barrier 702B is switched over effectively, the liquid crystal display 701 is used for 3D. If the image (left-eye image and right-eye image) is not displayed, it cannot be seen as a three-dimensional display (3D display). On the other hand, when the parallax barrier 702B is effectively switched, if 3D images (left-eye image and right-eye image) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 701, 3D display is performed on the screen of the display device 42.

The specific switching of the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier 702B is as follows.
-During 3D display: the parallax barrier 702B is enabled.
-During 2D display: the parallax barrier 702B is disabled.
At the time of a notice effect by special use of the parallax barrier 702B (Gase 3D display): The parallax barrier is made effective.

(2) Switching between 2D display mode and 3D display mode by the switch button 15 The player can select the 2D display mode and the 3D display mode by operating the switch button 15. Specifically, it is as follows.
2D display mode: In this mode, 2D display is always performed.
Therefore, when switching to the 2D display mode, the parallax barrier 702B is immediately switched to invalid.
-3D display mode: A mode that enables 3D display.
In this mode, 3D display or 2D display is performed. When performing 3D display in the 3D display mode, the parallax barrier 702B is effectively switched.
Even if the parallax barrier 702B is effectively switched in the 3D display mode, if the 3D image (the image for the left eye and the image for the right eye) is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 701, the image cannot be displayed in the 3D display. If the image for the right eye and the image for the right eye are the same, it becomes an aspect like a notice effect (gase 3D display) by special use of the parallax barrier 702B.
However, such a notice effect (gase 3D display) cannot be directly guided by the operation of the switch button 15 by the player, and the gase 3D display is performed by the control program of the effect control device 300. ing.

(3) Display Mode Table A table for 2D display mode and a table for 3D display mode are prepared for one effect. When the 2D display mode is set by operating the switching button 15, the 2D display mode table is used. When the 3D display mode is set, the 3D display mode table is used.
2D display mode table: An effect pattern of 2D display is defined.
3D display mode table: 2D display or 3D display effect patterns are defined.
When the 3D display start is requested by the display m (see FIG. 102) in this table, the parallax barrier 702B is switched over effectively. When the 2D display start is requested, the parallax barrier 702B is switched to invalid.

The symbol variation pattern is set as follows.
When the special figure has the same variation time, it is set to have two patterns of 2D display and 3D display.
-When the symbol is fixed, set it to 2D display even if it is a 3D display pattern.
Note that, in addition to this configuration, the entire configuration in which control is performed to produce a 2D display from the start of the fluctuation of the special drawing to the occurrence of reach will be described later with reference to the drawings as a modification of the invention.
-When winning is confirmed, the probability variation symbol may be displayed in 3D, and the normal symbol may be displayed in 2D.
This configuration will be described later with reference to the drawings as a modification of the invention.
Set to have 2D mode control table and 3D mode control table separately.
This is realized by the 2D effect control table 1 shown in FIG. 106 and the 3D effect control table 1 shown in FIG. At this time, the number of stages in the row (effect type) of the effect control table 1 and the 3D effect control table 1 is made the same. As a result, the structures of the 2D and 3D effect control tables are the same, and the switching between 2D display and 3D display is made efficient.

Next, FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of the advance notice table 1A, and the contents thereof are as follows.
“Const”: a constant in the c language that represents a constant.
“YOKOKU_INFO”: Indicates a structure name defined by a user (here, a game machine developer; the same applies hereinafter).
The structure here refers to an aggregate of one row of “sts to transparent p” (details will be described later). There are 5 rows with the same sequence, and they are defined as a single table (range enclosed by {} at the beginning and end).
“S_YOK_MAKI1A”: indicates the table name given by the user.
"//": In each line, the right of this mark indicates a comment.
More specifically, the structure name (YOKOKU_INFO, table name; s_YOK_MAKI1A) indicates, for example, the notice action table 1 specified in the first line of the left symbol variation table (early variation table).

  As shown in FIG. 102, the main data types of the notice action table 1A are sts (status), start f (start frame), display f (display frame), sound (sound parameter), display m (display mode). , Image p (image pattern table address), coordinate p (coordinate table address), and transparent p (transparent table address). The details are as follows.

sts (status): a code representing the control content in each line.
If this code is “sINI”, it means that the control is started (initial setting is performed if necessary), and if “1”, the notice control is continued (when the control on the current line is completed, the process proceeds to the next line). And “sEND” means the end of control.
Start f (start frame): indicates the number of frames corresponding to a waiting time (set value of a notice display start delay timer (delay timer)) until the presentation operation of the current row is started.
If the value of this start f (start frame) is “0”, it immediately starts (delay time is 0), and if it is not “0”, it is a time multiplied by a frame switching period (for example, 1/30 second). For example, if the start frame is “45” and the frame switching period is 1/30 seconds, the delay time is 1.5 seconds (= 45/30 seconds).

Display f (display frame): represents the time for executing the current line.
That is, it is the number of frames corresponding to the time from the start to the end of the current row control process.
Sound (sound parameter): represents a phrase number (for example, corresponding to a voice number) of a voice.
If this is “0”, it means that there is no audio output request.
Display m (display mode): As described above, when the user selection display mode is 3D display, this is a parameter for designating whether it is a 2D display section or a 3D display section.
The contents of the display m (display mode) are as follows.
“0”: No change request “1”: 2D display start request “2”: 3D display start request “3”: Gasset 3D display start request (2D display when switch liquid crystal is on)

Image p (image pattern table address): Information corresponding to an address of an image data table for designating character data (image data) to be displayed on the display device 41 as an effect operation.
If this is “NULL”, there is no table (no character drawing), which means that no image is displayed in the effect operation.
Coordinate p (coordinate table address): Information indicating the address of the coordinate data table (designated display position) of the character to be displayed.
If this is “NULL”, there is no table (no character drawing).
Transparent p (Transparent table address): Information corresponding to the address of the transparent data table that specifies the transparency of the character to be displayed.
If this is “NULL”, it means that the transparency is not set.

The type of the notice control table is not limited to one type as shown in FIG. 102, but in this specific example, it is described as a representative example for the sake of simplicity.
Now, with the table described above, the rendering operation is executed using 2D display and 3D display. That is, when the symbol variation table is specified based on the command received from the game control device 100, the rendering operation specified in each row of the symbol variation table (mainly, the symbol image is predetermined at a predetermined position on the screen of the display device 41). The operation of displaying in the state) is sequentially executed. If the notice table information is set in any row of the symbol variation table, the control for performing the effect operation of the notice control table designated by the notice table information at the time when the control of the line is started. The process is started (that is, the control of the notice effect is activated with the time when the control of the line is started as the reference timing).

And the control process of a notice effect is performed as follows.
That is, since the status (sts) is “sINI” in the first line of the notice action table 1A shown in FIG. 102, the first sequence immediately after the start of the symbol variable display control (that is, immediately after the notice table 1 execution designation timing). (Here, the sequence is a series of processes for one frame executed at each frame switching timing in the main process), and a notice effect initialization process is executed. At this time, the notice control table pointer is incremented by one. Is performed, and the row referred to in the notice operation table 1A is switched from the first to the second. Also, as the value of the notice display start delay timer (delay timer), a value (in time) corresponding to the value of the start frame (start f) of the notice action table 1A (“45” in the second row of the notice action table 1). Then, 1.5 seconds = 45/30 seconds) is set.

In the next second sequence, the line referenced in the notice action table 1A is second and the status (sts) is “1” (continue notice control), so the notice display start delay An update that reduces the timer value by 1 (by one frame) (that is, a process for advancing the timing of the delay timer) is executed. Next, a process of proceeding to the next row of the image pattern table, the coordinate table, and the transparency table as needed (a process of updating the image pattern control pointer, the coordinate control pointer, and the transparency control pointer) is executed, and then a notice is displayed. The same processing as the second sequence is repeatedly executed until the value of the start delay timer becomes 0 (in this case, the remaining 44 times are repeated in the same manner). In the 46th sequence, on the other hand, A notice effect image based on the second line of the notice action table 1A in the sequence is displayed.
In this case, the image of the blue closed scroll based on the image pattern table specified by “PIC_MAKICB” of the image pattern table address (image p) is the coordinate table specified by “ZTB_MK1” of the coordinate table address (coordinate p). Is displayed at a predetermined display position based on. In addition, sound output as a notice effect is performed based on the sound parameter (sound) of the notice action table 1A. However, in the specific example of FIG. 102, since the second line of the sound parameter (sound) is “0”, no sound is output in this case.

Thus, according to the notice operation table 1A of FIG. 102, the start f of the second line is “45” (that is, the set value of the notice display start delay timer is 45 frames), so The notice effect operation (display of the notice effect image and sound output) is actually started in the second sequence, and the notice effect operation is not started until the 45th sequence.
Then, in the state where the second line of the notice action table 1 is designated by the notice control table pointer, the third line is also designated as the display position based on the coordinate table designated by the coordinate “ZTB_MK1”. In the state, the display position based on the coordinate table specified by “ZTB_MK2” of the coordinate p is set to the display position based on the coordinate table specified by “ZTB_MK3” of the coordinate p in the state where the fourth row is also specified. A notice effect image (for example, a blue closed scroll) is displayed. As a result, for example, a moving image by sprite drawing in which the blue closed scroll MB1 falls downward from the upper side of the display screen 41a is displayed on the back or front of the decorative pattern of the special figure that is variably displayed. Become.

In the state where the second line of the advance notice table 1 is designated, the display m mode is designated as “3”, and therefore the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 of the display device 42 is on (parallax barrier is effective). As a result, the liquid crystal display 701 enters the gastric 3D display state. Here, although 3D display is possible, since the image of the liquid crystal display 701 is used for 2D display, not the original 3D image, but the 2D image is displayed as a gastric 3D image. A notice effect will be performed.
Further, in the state in which the fourth line of the advance notice table 1 is designated, the display m mode is designated as “1”, so that the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 of the display device 42 is off (parallax barrier disabled). Then, the liquid crystal display 701 enters a 2D display start state. In other rows, since the mode of the display m is designated as “0”, the operation of the switch liquid crystal 702 of the display device 42 is not changed, and the current display state is maintained.

Next, for each effect of 2D display and 3D display, a data table that can easily cope with both 2D mode and 3D mode by using a control table of one announcement effect and using offset information explain.
For this purpose, a RAM area for switching between 2D display and 3D display, an effect control table, and an image ROM are prepared. These will be described below.
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example of an area for storing 2D / 3D effect information in the RAM 311a that is built in the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 and provides a work area.
As shown in FIG. 103, the following information is stored in the area for storing 2D / 3D effect information in the RAM 311a, and the contents thereof are as follows.
“SYKCTR”: This label represents the function of the notice display information.
The notice display information includes the following.
-Preliminary action table-Initial state-Number of start frames-Number of display frames-Image pattern table-Coordinate table-Transparent table "R_Dim": Indicates the function of character offset information.
The character offset information is 0 at 2D display = 0 and at 3D display = 100. This is information relating to an address for matching the effect stage of character data (image data) displayed on the display device 41 in 2D display and 3D display.
In this example, the offset value is set to “0” in 2D display, and in the case of 3D display at the same stage of production, the offset value is set to “100” and the address is shifted by 100 so that the character is displayed in 2D display and 3D display. The production stage of data (image data) is matched.

  For example, when the display device 41 is producing a 3D display, if the player presses the switch button 15 at a predetermined timing and requests to switch to the 2D display, the 3D display effect that has been executed. In order to match the stage of the 2D display that is scheduled to be switched to the stage, the degree of offset of the 3D display address at the stage of the current stage is set in advance as “R_Dim” (character offset information). In addition, based on this offset value (offset information: a value to be added to the address), a predetermined value (here, “0”) is simply added to the head address of the corresponding 2D image data. 2D image data is obtained and switched to 2D display.

Next, FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of an effect control table incorporating “R_Dim” (character offset information).
FIG. 104 is an effect control table at the stage of the notice effect. The main data types include the same data types as shown in FIG. 102, but the contents of the image p are different (the same data as in FIG. 102). Type omits duplicate explanation). Therefore, the contents of the image p will be described as follows.
The image p (image pattern table address) is information corresponding to the address of the image data table for designating character data (image data) to be displayed on the display device 41 as a rendering operation. Through the image p of the seventh to seventh rows, “R_Dim” (character offset information) is added after the image pattern table address as follows.
Two-line image p: “PIC_MAKIS1” + “R_Dim”
3-line image p: “PIC_MAKIS2” + “R_Dim”
4-line image p: “PIC_MAKISH” + “R_Dim”
5-line image p: “PIC_MAKISA” + “R_Dim”
Six lines of images p: “PIC_MAKISF” + “R_Dim”
7-line image p: “PIC_MAKISB” + “R_Dim”
Thereby, for example, in the stage of production of two lines, the character (image) based on the image pattern table specified by “PIC_MAKIS1” + “R_Dim” of the image pattern table address (image p) is the coordinate table address (coordinate p). It is displayed at a predetermined display position based on the coordinate table specified by “ZTB_MK1”.

Here, an example of the image pattern table specified by the image p (image pattern table address) is shown in FIG.
The image pattern table shown in FIG. 105 is stored in advance in the image ROM 322 of the effect control device 300, and holds 2D display and 3D display image data. In FIG. 105, information with offset values “0” to “5” corresponds to image data in 2D display. For example, when the offset value is “0”, the image data is “AG_CG_PIC_MAKIS1”. Similarly, when the offset value is “5”, the image data is “AG_CG_PIC_MAKISB”.
On the other hand, information with offset values “100” to “105” corresponds to image data in 3D display. For example, when the offset value is “100”, the image data is “AG_CG_PIC_MAKIS1_3D”. Similarly, when the offset value is “105”, the image data is “AG_CG_PIC_MAKISB_3D”.
Note that what is shown in FIG. 105 is an example of a part of the image pattern table, but this is not all.

In this way, when performing the notice effect, the image data at the effect stage corresponding to a certain effect control table as shown in FIG. 104 is specified using the image p (image pattern table address), At this time, if “R_Dim” (character offset information) is added to the image p, an offset value is obtained by referring to “R_Dim” (character offset information) shown in FIG. 103, and stored in the image ROM 322 shown in FIG. Information (image data) corresponding to the image p (image pattern table address) is read out from the image data and necessary image data is prepared.
In the present embodiment, 2D display image data at the corresponding stage of production is specified in the stage control table shown in FIG. 104, and if the current display mode is the 2D mode, “R_Dim” (character offset information) = 0. (As the address, +0 is added), the image data as specified here is used.
On the other hand, if the current display mode is the 3D mode, “R_Dim” (character offset information) = 100 (address is added with +100) and +100 is added to the image p (image pattern table address) of the image data specified above. Is added to obtain an offset address, and +100 is added to the offset address to set 3D image data at the same stage of production.
Therefore, in the 3D mode, simply adding “R_Dim” (character offset information) (for example, +100) to offset (shift) the address, the 3D image data at the same stage corresponding to the display mode can be obtained. Can be set.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
A display state changing means for switching the parallax barrier between invalid and valid to control to 2D display or 3D display;
Table setting means for setting an effect control table corresponding to the effect contents of the effect means;
Effect content determining means for determining the effect content of the effect means based on the effect control table of the table setting means,
Provide a switch button that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display,
The table setting means includes
Set a common variation pattern for 2D display and 3D display, and set the table to use 2D image data for 2D display and 3D image data for 3D display.
The display state changing means includes
Based on the operation of the switch button, the display state of the effect means is switched to 2D display or 3D display,
The production content determination means includes
When switched to 3D display based on the production control table, production is performed using 3D image data,
When switched to 2D display, a game machine is characterized in that the content of the effect is determined so that the effect is performed using the 2D image data.

With such a configuration, the player can select the 2D display mode or the 3D display mode, so even a person who is difficult to see the 3D display can enjoy the 2D display.
Further, since the variation pattern of the game control device 100 which is the main board is common to 2D display / 3D display, the ROM capacity (capacity of the ROM 101B and the PROM 321) of the game control apparatus 100 and the effect control apparatus 300 can be suppressed, and the efficiency The effect is that it can be developed.
In addition, when the 3D mode is set, the 3D image data at the same stage can be set only by offsetting (shifting) the address of the data in the 2D mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the control efficiency is good.

The inventive concept of the configuration for setting 3D image data by offset is expressed as follows.
Image data storage means for storing the image data;
The image data storage means
2. A game machine characterized by storing 2D image data and 3D image data set so that an address can be specified using a value of a difference from the address of the 2D image data.

The inventive concept of setting image data by reading from the image ROM is expressed as follows.
The table setting means includes
For 2D display, 2D image data is read from the image data storage means,
In the 3D display, the gaming machine is characterized in that 3D image data is read from the image data storage means and a table is set.

In addition, the image ROM 322 of the effect control device 300 stores 2D images and 3D image data of the same effect type offset from the addresses of the 2D images as an image pattern table. When the location (effect type) that has become is generated, data such as other characters is arranged at the location where the tooth is missing.
In this way, the image ROM can be used efficiently.
The inventive concept of the configuration relating to the data omission is expressed as follows.
Image data storage means for storing the image data;
The image data storage means
Storing 2D image data and 3D image data set so that an address can be specified using a value of a difference from the address of the 2D image data;
When performing a dedicated effect in 2D display or 3D display, by setting data of a predetermined character at the address of the other same part, while maintaining a common variation pattern in 2D display and 3D display, A gaming machine, wherein data is arranged so that switching from any display state to 2D display or 3D display is possible.

Next, a description will be given of a data structure that can handle both effects in the 2D mode and the 3D mode by using the control table for the notice effect separately for each effect of 2D display and 3D display.
For this purpose, an effect control table is prepared separately for each effect of 2D display / 3D display. These will be described below.
FIG. 106 shows the 2D effect control table 1, and the effect that uses the scroll as a material for the notice effect is performed in 2D display (the 3D effect control table is separate and will be described later).
The 2D effect control table 1 shown in FIG. 106 has the same main data type as the notice operation table 1A described in FIG. 102, and includes a status (sts), a start frame (start f), a display frame ( The display f), sound parameter (sound), display mode (display m), image pattern table address (image p), coordinate table address (coordinate p), and transmission table address (transmission p) are the same.
However, since the 2D effect control table 1 in FIG. 106 is a table for 2D effect, image data for designating character data (image data) for 2D display by the image pattern table address (image p). It corresponds to the address of the table.
That is, the following is set as an image pattern table address in the image p of the 1st to 8th rows of the 2D effect control table 1 shown in FIG.
One-line image p: “NULL”
Two-line image p: “PIC_MAKI2S1”
3-line image p: “PIC_MAKI2S2”
4-line image p: “PIC_MAKI2SH”
5-line image p: “PIC_MAKI2SA”
Six lines of image p: “PIC_MAKI2SF”
7-line image p: “PIC_MAKI2SB”
8-line image p: “NULL”
Here, the image p of 6 lines is set as “PIC_MAKI2SF”, and this is an address for designating image data for performing an effect on the 2D character A (effect effect dedicated to 2D).

On the other hand, what is shown in FIG. 107 is a 3D effect control table 1, and this 3D effect control table 1 has the same main data type as the notice operation table 1A described in FIG. (Sts), start frame (start f), display frame (display f), sound parameter (sound), display mode (display m), image pattern table address (image p), coordinate table address (coordinate p), transmission table The address (transparent p) is the same.
However, since the 3D effect control table 1 in FIG. 107 is a table for 3D effect, image data for designating character data (image data) for 3D display by the image pattern table address (image p). It corresponds to the address of the table.

That is, the following is set as an image pattern table address in the image p of the 1st to 8th rows of the 3D effect control table 1 shown in FIG.
One-line image p: “NULL”
Two-line image p: “PIC_MAKI3S1”
3-line image p: “PIC_MAKI3S2”
4-line image p: “PIC_MAKI3SH”
5-line image p: “PIC_MAKI3SA”
6-line image p: “NULL”
7-line image p: “PIC_MAKI3SB”
8-line image p: “NULL”
Here, the image p of 6 lines is set as “NULL”. This is an address for designating image data that does not change (no effect is given) to the 3D character A, but each table of the 2D effect control table 1 and the 3D effect control table 1 is used. In order to match the number of rows in the bull, even if there is no change in the image data of the 3D effect, “NULL” is set as the image p of the 6 lines corresponding to the effect effect of the 2D image. Is.

By doing in this way, the number of rows of the 2D effect control table 1 and the 3D effect control table 1 becomes 8 rows, and the same. When the effects are switched between the 2D display and the 3D display, the corresponding table pointers of the respective tables (2D effect control table 1 and 3D effect control table 1) are displayed. An effect is performed by designating image data based on the above.
Therefore, the structures of the 2D and 3D effect control tables are the same, and switching between 2D display and 3D display can be performed efficiently.

Here, the 2D effect control table 1 and the 3D effect control table 1 will be described in relation to the main board (game control device 100) as follows.
In the pachinko machine 1 (game machine) in which the display device 41 can select 2D display / 3D display, the effect control device 300 performs 2D display or one variation pattern determined by the main board (game control device 100). The 3D display is performed because the main board is not involved and the stage control device 300 can freely determine the stage (however, within the command range from the main board).
The effect control device 300 is configured to have 2D display and 3D display effect control tables, respectively, and to switch and control them. Then, the structure of each effect control table of 2D display and 3D display is made the same (the number of stages is matched).
In the effect control, for example, 3D display data is set in the same stage as the 2D effect control table of the 3D effect control table corresponding to the effect addition at the time of 2D display (the stage where no effect is added). Unnecessary data).
In 2D display and 3D display, the variation time value is adjusted so that the same symbol variation time is obtained.
When performing 2D / 3D display switching during symbol variation, the effect is switched based on the corresponding table pointer in each effect control table.
With the above configuration, switching between 2D display and 3D display can be efficiently controlled.

In addition, the structure of the 2D effect control table 1 and the 3D effect control table 1 has the following effects.
In the main board (game control apparatus 100), the fluctuation pattern of 2D display and 3D display is used in common, and the symbol change command is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300, so there is no control burden on the main board side, and the control efficiency Is good.
The production control device 300 has production patterns of 2D display and 3D display, but only the effect corresponding to the 2D display is added to the portion corresponding to the 3D display, so the capacity of the image ROM 322 of the production control device 300 There is an advantage that it is not so much.
By making each stage control table shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 have the same number of stages, 2D / 3D display switching processing can be performed efficiently.

Here, the effects of the configuration in which the 2D display and 3D display effect control tables are set to the same structure as described above are summarized as follows.
(1) As shown in the 2D effect control table 1 (FIG. 106) and the 3D effect control table 1 (FIG. 107) described above, when setting the effect control table corresponding to the effect content of the display device 41, Since the effect control tables for 2D display and 3D display are set to the same structure, switching between 2D display and 3D display can be performed efficiently.
The same structure means that the number of rows of the 2D effect control table 1 and the 3D effect control table 1 is 8 lines, and the effect is the same between 2D display and 3D display. When switching between each other (2D effect control table 1 and 3D effect control table 1), the image data is simply designated on the basis of the corresponding table pointers to switch the effects. (Ie, switching between 2D display and 3D display can be controlled efficiently).

(2) Since the main board (game control device 100) is configured to transmit the symbol change command and the like to the effect control device 300 by sharing the change pattern of 2D display and 3D display, there is no control burden even on the main board side. There is an effect that efficiency is good.
(3) The production control device 300 has production patterns of 2D display and 3D display based on the 2D production control table 1 and the 3D production control table 1, respectively, but the 3D production control table 1 For the portion corresponding to the special 3D display, the 2D effect control table 1 simply adds effects and the like for 2D display, so that the capacity of the image ROM 322 of the effect control device 300 does not increase too much. There are advantages.
(4) In the effect control, for example, by setting the data for 3D display in the same stage as the 2D effect control table 1 of the 3D effect control table 1 corresponding to the effect addition at the time of 2D display (the stage where no effect is added). Even if the data is unnecessary for 3D display, it can have the same number of stages in each effect control table, and the switching process of 2D / 3D display can be performed efficiently.
(5) Moreover, in 2D display and 3D display, since the time value of a fluctuation | variation is adjusted so that it may become the same symbol fluctuation | variation time, switching of 2D display and 3D display can be controlled efficiently.

The concept of the invention in the case where the effect control tables for 2D display and 3D display are set to the same structure as described above is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The production control device
Display state changing means for controlling the effect means to 2D display or 3D display;
Table setting means for setting an effect control table corresponding to the effect contents of the effect means,
The table setting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the 2D display and 3D display effect control tables are set to the same structure.

The inventive concept when the parallax barrier 702B is configured to be switched between enabled and disabled by the switch liquid crystal 702 is expressed as follows.
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The display state changing means includes
A gaming machine having a configuration in which the parallax barrier is switched between invalid and valid to control the effect means to 2D display or 3D display.

In addition, the inventive concept when the number of types of effects on the table is the same is expressed as follows.
The table setting means includes
An effect control table is set separately for the effect control table for 2D display and the effect control table for 3D display.
A game machine characterized in that each production control table has the same number of production types performed in one variation display game.

The inventive concept for setting effects in the 2D display table is expressed as follows.
The table setting means includes
An effect control table is set separately for the effect control table for 2D display and the effect control table for 3D display.
In each production control table, data is arranged so that a plurality of production types performed in one variation display game are sequentially designated and executed,
For the data of the same kind of effect type, when the effect is applied in the 2D display, even if there is no change in the effect of the 3D display, the data is also arranged in the same order of the effect type for 3D, A gaming machine characterized in that the total number of types of effects in each effect control table for 2D display and 3D display is matched.

In addition, the concept of the invention in the case where the variation time is set to be the same in 2D display and 3D display is expressed as follows.
The table setting means includes
An effect control table is set separately for the effect control table for 2D display and the effect control table for 3D display.
A game machine characterized in that, in each effect control table, the variation time of a symbol performed in one variation display game is set to the same time for 2D display and 3D display.

Further, the inventive concept for switching the effect type with the pointer is expressed as follows.
The table setting means includes
An effect control table is set separately for the effect control table for 2D display and the effect control table for 3D display.
In each effect control table for 2D display and 3D display, data is arranged so that a plurality of effect types performed in one variation display game are sequentially designated by a pointer and executed.
The display state changing means includes
A game machine characterized in that, when the screen of the effect means is switched to 2D display or 3D display during a variable display game, the effect type designated by the pointer is used as a switching unit.

Next, a specific example of the display device 41 will be described.
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the effect image while showing the screen of the display unit 41a in the display device 41 (A2 to A6 in the figure represent the screen). In the following description, the special figure refers to a decorative special figure that is displayed on the screen of the display unit 41a (the same applies hereinafter).
Further, the display device 41 adopts a parallax barrier method, and alternately displays a left-eye image and a right-eye image on the screen of the display unit 41a, and both 2D display and 3D display images are viewed through the parallax barrier. In the following description, it is simply referred to as 2D display or 3D display. However, in 2D display, the left-eye image and the right-eye image are the same. In 3D display, the left-eye image and the right-eye image are displayed. Since the images are displayed alternately, a detailed description of the left-eye and right-eye images is omitted.
Therefore, the left-eye image and the right-eye image are the same when simply referred to as 2D display, and the left-eye image and right-eye image are alternately described when described as simply 3D display.

First, as shown in A1 of FIG. 108, the display unit 41a of the display device 41 is divided into three regions AR, BR, and CR (for example, the region of the display unit 41a is divided into upper, middle, and lower), Each area AR, BR, CR can be controlled independently for 2D / 3D switching.
That is, the display device 41 includes the liquid crystal display 701, the switch liquid crystal 702, and the backlight 703 as described with reference to FIG. 6, but is divided into three so as to correspond to the three areas AR, BR, and CR. Thus, each has a configuration capable of independently performing 2D / 3D switching control. In this case, the switch liquid crystal 702 divided so as to correspond to the three areas AR, BR, and CR is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 and controlled based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311. Each of the areas AR, BR, and CR can be independently controlled to enable / disable the parallax barrier 702B.
The liquid crystal display 701 divided so as to correspond to the three areas AR, BR, and CR is connected to the VDP 312 of the effect control device 300, and displays an image necessary for a game such as a variable display game based on a signal from the VDP 312. To do.
The backlight 703 divided so as to correspond to the three areas AR, BR, and CR illuminates them from the back of the liquid crystal display 701 and the switch liquid crystal 702.

Screens A2 and A3 in FIG. 108 are diagrams showing how the three areas AR, BR, and CR of the display device 41 are collectively controlled.
Screen A2 is an example during 2D display. At this time, switch liquid crystal 702 disables parallax barriers 702B for each area AR, BR, and CR collectively based on a signal from main control microcomputer 311 of effect control device 300. To control. Accordingly, each of the areas AR, BR, and CR is in a 2D display state, and a special figure such as “1, 2, 3” is displayed in 2D.
On the other hand, the screen A3 is an example at the time of 3D display. At this time, the switch liquid crystal 702 collects the parallax barriers 702B of the respective areas AR, BR, and CR based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. Control effectively. Accordingly, each of the areas AR, BR, and CR is in a 3D display state, and, for example, a special drawing “1, 2, 3” is displayed in 3D in 3D.

Screens A4 to A6 in FIG. 108 are diagrams showing how the three areas AR, BR, and CR of the display device 41 are controlled independently.
The screen A4 is an example in which the area AR, BR is 3D display, and the area CR is 2D display. At this time, the switch liquid crystal 702 effectively controls the parallax barrier 702B for the areas AR and BR, and invalidally controls the parallax barrier 702B for the area CR based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control apparatus 300. . Therefore, the areas AR and BR are in a 3D display state, and a special figure such as “1, 2, 1” is displayed in 3D, and the area CR is in a 2D display state, for example, a special figure start memory is displayed in 2D. . Since there are two start ports (start ports 25 and 26), two types of special chart start memory (special figure start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). A white circle represents a special figure 1 hold display, and a black circle represents a special figure 2 hold display.

  In the screen A5, the area AR is 2D display, the area BR is 3D display, and the area CR is 2D display. At this time, the switch liquid crystal 702 effectively controls the parallax barrier 702B for the region BR and invalidally controls the parallax barrier 702B for the regions AR and CR based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. . Accordingly, the area BR is in a 3D display state, and a special figure such as “6, ↓, 6” is displayed in 3D, and the area AR is in a 2D display state. The message CR is displayed in 2D, and the region CR is in the 2D display state. For example, the special figure start memory is displayed in 2D (the meanings of the white circle and black circle in the special figure start memory are the same as those on the screen A4).

  Screen A6 is an example in which 3D display is performed in areas AR, BR, and CR. At this time, the switch liquid crystal 702 effectively controls the parallax barrier 702B for all of the areas AR, BR, and CR based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. Accordingly, all the areas AR, BR, and CR are in a 3D display state, and a special figure such as “7, changing (6, 7), 7” is displayed in 3D, resulting in a powerful reach effect.

In this way, the three regions AR, BR, and CR (the switch liquid crystal 702 and the parallax barrier 702B are classified corresponding to the three regions) of the display device 41 can be controlled independently to produce 2D display / 3D display. The configuration has the following effects.
Corresponding to the screen of the display device 41, the area of the switch liquid crystal 702 (including the parallax barrier 702B) is divided into, for example, three areas of upper, middle, and lower (that is, AR, BR, CR), and 2D / Since the switching of 3D display is made operable, it is possible to display the special figure hold memory display that the player often sees in the 2D area, and the effect that the player does not get tired even when watching for a long time. is there.
In addition, a more effective presentation can be achieved by changing the entire screen to a 3D display area including a normal 2D display area (for example, a special figure hold storage display area).
In addition, among the screens of the display device 41, for example, compared to a variable display (display device) in which the upper region (upper: AR) is fixed to 3D display and the lower region (lower: CR) is fixed to 2D display, Increases freedom.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switched between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The switch liquid crystal region is divided into a plurality of regions, and the parallax barrier is configured to be operable independently for each of the plurality of divided regions,
The production control device
A state in which the parallax barrier is disabled and 2D display is performed;
A display state changing means for switching the display state of the effect means to a state in which the parallax barrier is enabled and 3D display is provided;
The display state changing means includes
A gaming machine configured to be capable of independently operating a parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal divided into a plurality of regions.

Next, FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the operation of the notice effect by special use of the parallax barrier.
109 denote the screen of the display unit 41 a in the display device 41.
In the operation description of FIGS. 109 to 116, the three areas AR, BR, and CR of the display device 41 are collectively controlled unless otherwise specified.
Now, as shown in the screen B1, when the reach variation pattern such as the special figure “7, changing, 7” is displayed, the switch liquid crystal 702 is based on the signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. Thus, the parallax barrier 702B is controlled to be invalid, whereby the reach variation symbol is produced in the 2D display state. At this time, the left-eye image and the right-eye image are the same, and therefore the reach variation symbol is displayed in 2D. The black circle on the screen B1 represents the special figure start memory (the same applies to other screens). In general, in a normal gaming state, the screen of the display device 41 is often rendered in 2D display, and this embodiment also operates as such. In addition, in order to increase the expectation for the big hit, when the change from the reach change to the notice change before the big hit through the notice effect, the effect is given in 3D display.

Next, in order to give a sense of expectation to the big hit, the switch liquid crystal 702 receives a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 when the reach variation (the left eye image and the right eye image are in the same state). Based on this, the parallax barrier 702B is effectively controlled. Then, as shown in the screen B2, the parallax barrier 702B blocks a part of the light path from the backlight 703, so the liquid crystal display 701 appears to darken the entire screen for a moment. The reach fluctuation pattern of “7” becomes unclear. In addition, several small star (☆) marks are displayed at the center of the reach variation symbol to show that it is a premium effect. For example, a cherry mark may be used instead of the star mark.
In this case, since the parallax barrier 702B is enabled while the left-eye and right-eye images are in the same state, the reach variation pattern does not appear 3D (three-dimensional).
Therefore, the player has an impression that it is clearly different from normal 2D display or 3D display, and comes to think that it is a premium image. Therefore, the expectation to the big hit can be given to the appearance of the effect image different from the normal.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
2D display with the parallax barrier enabled,
A state in which the parallax barrier is disabled and 2D display is performed;
A gaming machine comprising: a display state changing means for switching a display state of the effect means to a state where 3D display is performed with the parallax barrier enabled.

Next, when the screen B2 is shifted to the screen B3, the switch liquid crystal 702 controls the parallax barrier 702B from valid to invalid based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. At this time, the left-eye image and the right-eye image are in the same state.
As a result, the reach variation symbol is produced in a normal 2D display state, the entire screen is bright, and the variation symbol is clearly displayed.
Note that, when the screen B2 is shifted to the screen B3, the reach variation symbol is produced in the 2D display state.

On the other hand, when the screen B2 is shifted to the screen B4, the switch liquid crystal 702 maintains the parallax barrier 702B based on the signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, and the VDP 312 of the effect control device 300 is for the left eye. The liquid crystal display 701 is controlled so that images and right-eye images are alternately displayed. At this time, the image for the left eye and the image for the right eye are dedicated images and are different.
In this case, the state of the screen B2 is used as a notice effect for 3D display (screen B4).
As a result, the reach variation symbol is produced in a normal 3D display state, and the entire screen is bright and the variation symbol is clearly displayed on the liquid crystal display 701.
Note that, when the screen B2 is shifted to the screen B4, the reach variation symbol is produced in a 3D display state, and thus, for example, a big hit result mode may be obtained.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display state changing means is
A gaming machine, wherein the display state of the effect means is switched to a state in which the parallax barrier is enabled and 2D display is performed, and a 3D display notice effect is performed in this state.

Next, FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing control of decoration effects and parallax barriers.
As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a frame illumination part 84 and a board outer peripheral illumination part 83, and the game board 20 has a center case illumination part 82 and a display area peripheral illumination part 81. Is provided. Hereinafter, these illumination units are defined as follows and shown in FIG.
Display area peripheral illumination unit 81 = lamp group A
・ Center case lighting section 82 = Lamp group B
-Panel surface outer illumination unit 83 = lamp group C
Frame illumination unit 84 = lamp group D
These illuminating units 81 to 84 are arranged under the names of lamp groups having the symbols A, B, C, and D in order from a place close to the display device 41 to a place far away.
Then, the effect control device 300 controls the decoration effect (for example, the effect of lighting or blinking the lamp group) for each of the four illumination units 81 to 84.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
A plurality of lighting groups are arranged on the front side of the gaming machine,
The production control device
A gaming machine comprising: a decoration effect control means for dividing the plurality of illumination groups as the distance from a place close to the effect means increases, and for effecting decoration on the divided control parts.

In FIG. 110, the shutter accessory is a mechanical shutter accessory mechanism 801 disposed on the front side of the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 111, extremely thin shutters (movable members) 801a and 801b. Thus, the front side of the display device 41 is shielded, and the front side of the display device 41 is released by separating the front side.
Note that the shutter accessory mechanism 801 controls the opening and closing of the shutters 801a and 801b based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 (the same applies hereinafter).
Referring to the operation of FIG. 110, the fluctuation of the special figure is normally started from the state of the 2D display. At this time, the switch liquid crystal 702 is based on the signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 based on the parallax barrier 702B. As a result, the special figure variation symbol is produced in 2D display on the liquid crystal display 701. In this case, the image for the left eye and the image for the right eye are the same, and therefore the special figure variation symbol is displayed in 2D.

Thereafter, for example, in the case of reach occurrence, the variation pattern of the special figure is displayed in 3D aiming at the effect to the player. At that time, before the transition to the 3D display, each lighting unit 81 To 84 are controlled to move and blink in the order of lamp group D → lamp group C → lamp group B → lamp group A.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110, before shifting to the 3D display, each of the lighting units 81 to 84 is turned on once in the order of lamp group D → lamp group C → lamp group B → lamp group A. -Decoration control is performed in which the turning-off operation is repeated twice in a short time.
Therefore, the frame illumination unit 84 (lamp group D) located farthest from the display device 41 is turned on and off once in order toward the display device 42, and finally the display closest to the display device 41 is displayed. The area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) is turned on / off once, and this operation is repeated twice. As if a plurality of lamp groups are connected from the frame side of the pachinko machine 1 to the central display device 41. An effect such as moving and blinking toward the screen can be performed. This prevents the player's attention and misses the subsequent 3D display effect.
In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to strongly give the player an impression of the effects of moving and blinking the lighting units 81 to 84.

Meanwhile, at this time, from the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b of the effect control device 300, the lighting units 81 to 84 are moved and blinked in the order of lamp group D → lamp group C → lamp group B → lamp group A. A sound effect signal is output to each of the upper speaker 12a and the lower speaker 12b, and a sound effect is output from each of the speakers 12a and 12b to draw the player's attention.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
A sound for performing a control to output a predetermined sound effect from the alarm device according to a different decoration effect of the illumination group when the decoration effect control means performs a different decoration effect on the plurality of illumination groups arranged sequentially apart from each other. A gaming machine comprising a control means.

  In addition, as an aspect different from the above decoration control, for example, the frame illumination unit 84 (lamp group D) is repeatedly turned on and off twice, and then slightly delayed (but immediately after the first on). ) Turn on / off the panel outer periphery illumination unit 83 (lamp group C) twice, and then turn on the center case illumination unit 82 (lamp group B) twice immediately after the first turn-on of the previous lamp group. The display area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) may be turned on and off twice in the same manner. In this way, in addition to the effect of drawing the player's attention and preventing the subsequent 3D display effect from being overlooked, the effect can be performed while clearly impressing the decorative outlines of the lighting units 81 to 84. it can.

Next, immediately after the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) located closest to the display device 41 is turned on / off last (or almost simultaneously), the frame illumination unit 84 (lamp group D) and the panel peripheral illumination The unit 83 (lamp group C) is controlled to be in a blinking state that repeats blinking in a short time (however, the panel surface outer periphery illumination unit 83 (lamp group C) slightly delays the start of blinking). This blinking state continues until the liquid crystal display 701 becomes 3D display and ends.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Multiple lighting groups
It is arranged sequentially away from the place close to the production means,
The decoration effect control means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by performing different decoration effects on a plurality of lighting groups arranged sequentially apart.
At this time, the shutter accessory mechanism 801 immediately after the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) located closest to the display device 41 is turned on / off once and before the second on / off is started. However, based on the signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, the shutters 801a and 801b are moved for a short time to shield the front side of the display device 41, and then the shutters 801a and 801b are separated into left and right. The front side shield of the display device 41 is released. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention and missing the subsequent 3D display effect.

Furthermore, immediately after the shutters 801 a and 801 b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 shield the front side of the display device 41 for a short time, the switch liquid crystal 702 is based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 based on the parallax barrier 702 B. To effectively control. At this time, the image for the left eye and the image for the right eye are different images, and thus the image of the liquid crystal display 701 is displayed in 3D.
Next, the shutters 801 a and 801 b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 immediately open to the left and right so as to release the shielding on the front side of the display device 41. As a result, the 3D display image of the liquid crystal display 701 becomes visible to the player, and a 3D display effect is performed.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
A shutter accessory mechanism capable of shielding the front side of the production means,
Before the effect means starts 3D display, the shutter accessory mechanism shields the front side of the effect means, and then after the effect means starts 3D display, the shutter accessory mechanism blocks the front side of the effect means. A gaming machine comprising a shutter accessory control means for controlling the operation of the shutter accessory mechanism so as to be released.

At this time, both the center case illumination unit 82 (lamp group B) and the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) close to the display device 41 are controlled to be in an OFF state, whereby the lamp group around the liquid crystal display 701 is obtained. Turns off to make it easier to see 3D images.
That is, at the start of 3D display, both the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) located closest to the display device 41 and the center case illumination unit 82 (lamp group B) located next to the display device 41 are turned off ( The liquid crystal display 701 of the display device 41 is darkened to make the liquid crystal screen easier to see.
In particular, among the illumination units 81 to 84, the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 that is closest to the display device 41 is configured to include a transparent dark red material, so that when the display device 41 starts 3D display. When the lamp is turned off (dark), the contrast between the brightness when the lamps are turned on and the darkness when the lamps are turned off stands out, the contrast can be increased, and the production effect is further enhanced.
In addition, when the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 including a transparent dark red material is turned off (turned off), the area around the liquid crystal display 701 of the display device 41 becomes much darker, and the liquid crystal screen can be made extremely easy to see. .
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Multiple lighting groups
A gaming machine characterized in that the lighting group closest to the production means includes a transparent dark red material.

Thus, before moving to the 3D display, the lighting units 81 to 84 are moved and blinked in the order of lamp group D → lamp group C → lamp group B → lamp group A, and then close to the display device 41. After a certain display area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) and center case illumination unit 82 (lamp group B) are turned off (extinguishes), control for starting 3D display on the display device 41 is performed.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Multiple lighting groups
It is arranged sequentially away from the place close to the production means,
The decoration effect control means includes:
Before the effect means starts 3D display, a plurality of lighting groups arranged sequentially away from the outside of the gaming machine toward the effect means in the center are sequentially moved and blinked. A game machine characterized by controlling to turn off a nearby illumination group and then start 3D display of the rendering means.

Further, as described above, before moving to the 3D display, each of the illumination units 81 to 84 is moved and blinked in the order of the lamp group D → the lamp group C → the lamp group B → the lamp group A, and then the shutter accessory. The shutters 801a and 801b of the mechanism 801 perform an operation of shielding and opening the front side of the display device 41 for a short time, and the liquid crystal display 701 performs 3D display image effects.
Therefore, the shutters 801a and 801b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 move so as to be in a closed state (a state in which the front side of the display device 41 is shielded) when the parallax barrier 702B is effectively switched. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable on the screen at the time.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The production control device
Display state changing means for controlling the effect means to 2D display or 3D display;
Shielding means capable of placing the front surface of the rendering means in a shielding state;
Production control means for controlling the operation of the shielding means,
The production control means includes
When the effect means is switched from 2D display to 3D display, the shielding means is displaced to shield the front face of the effect means, and after the display state changing means is set to the 3D display state, the shield means is retracted from the front face of the effect means. A gaming machine that is controlled so as to be returned to a completed state.

The inventive concept when the parallax barrier 702B is configured to be switched between enabled and disabled by the switch liquid crystal 702 is expressed as follows.
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The display state changing means includes
Switching the parallax barrier between invalid and valid and controlling the rendering means to 2D display or 3D display;
The production control means includes
When the effecting means is switched from 2D display to 3D display, the shielding means is displaced to shield the front surface of the effecting means, and the display state changing means effectively switches the parallax barrier to the 3D display state, and then the shielding means Is controlled so as to be restored to the state of being retracted from the front surface of the production means.
The inventive concept of the above configuration relating to the shutter accessory mechanism 801 is expressed as follows.
The shielding means includes
A gaming machine comprising a shutter accessory mechanism capable of mechanically shielding the front surface of the rendering means.

When the shutters 801a and 801b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 are movable, sound effect signals are output from the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b of the effect control device 300 to the upper speaker 12a and the lower speaker 12b, respectively, and each speaker 12a is output. , 12b to output a sound effect and draw the player's attention.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
When the effect control means displaces the shielding means to shield the front surface of the effect means, and then returns the shielding means to a state where it is retracted from the front surface of the effect means, a predetermined sound is output from the reporting device according to the displacement of the shielding means. A game machine comprising sound control means for performing control to output a sound effect.

Here, the effects related to the movement blinking of each of the illumination units 81 to 84 and the operation of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 as described above are summarized as follows.
(1) In the case of reach occurrence, the special symbol variation symbol is displayed in 3D. At that time, before shifting to the 3D display, each of the illumination units 81 to 84 is connected to the lamp group D → lamp group C. Control is performed to move and blink in the order of lamp group B → lamp group A. That is, before shifting to the 3D display, each lighting unit 81 to 84 is turned on / off once in the order of lamp group D → lamp group C → lamp group B → lamp group A in a short time. The decoration control is repeated repeatedly.
Therefore, the frame illumination unit 84 (lamp group D) located farthest from the display device 41 is turned on and off once in order toward the display device 42, and finally the display closest to the display device 41 is displayed. The area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) is turned on / off once, and this operation is repeated twice. As if a plurality of lamp groups are connected from the frame side of the pachinko machine 1 to the central display device 41. An effect such as moving and blinking toward the screen can be performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's attention and miss the subsequent 3D display effect.

(2) Further, with this configuration, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player by the movement and blinking of each illumination unit 81 to 84. (3) Each illumination unit 81 to 84 is connected to lamp group D → lamp group C. In accordance with the control of moving and blinking in the order of lamp group B → lamp group A, sound effect signals are output from the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b of the effect control device 300 to the upper speaker 12a and the lower speaker 12b, respectively. Since sound effects are output from 12a and 12b, the player's attention can be drawn and the production effect can be enhanced.
(4) When performing 3D display, the center case illumination unit 82 (lamp group B) and the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) close to the display device 41 are both controlled to be in an off state, so that the liquid crystal display The lamp group around the device 701 is turned off, so that the 3D display image can be easily viewed. That is, when performing 3D display, the periphery of the liquid crystal display 701 of the display device 41 can be darkened to make the liquid crystal screen easier to see.

(5) In particular, the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 that is closest to the display device 41 among the illumination units 81 to 84 is configured to include a transparent dark red material, so that the 3D display of the display device 41 is performed. When turned off (turned off) at the start, the contrast between the brightness when the lamps are turned on and the darkness when the lamps are turned off stands out, so that the contrast can be increased and the production effect can be further enhanced.
(6) Further, when the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 including a transparent dark red material is turned off (turned off), the area around the liquid crystal display 701 of the display device 41 becomes much darker, making the liquid crystal screen extremely easy to see. be able to.
(7) Before starting the 3D display, immediately after the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) located closest to the display device 41 is turned on / off once and before the second on / off is started. The shutter accessory mechanism 801 moves the shutters 801a and 801b for a short time to shield the front side of the display device 41, and then separates the shutters 801a and 801b to the left and right to release the shielding on the front side of the display device 41. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving the attention and missing the subsequent 3D display effect.

Next, FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the operation of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 at the time of switching the parallax barrier 702B, and this operation is based on the timing chart of FIG. 110 described above.
The description of FIG. 111 uses the concept of scenes, and scenes C1 to C4 are concepts representing scenes of the entire rendering operation including the rendering screen of the display unit 41a of the display device 41 and the shutter accessory mechanism.
First, in the scene C1, the switch liquid crystal 702 controls the parallax barrier 702B to be invalid based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, whereby the special display variation symbol is displayed in 2D on the liquid crystal display 701. In this example, the reach design effect of “7, changing (7, 8), 7” is performed in 2D display. A black circle in the screen represents special figure start memory (the same applies hereinafter).
The shutter accessory mechanism 801 is in a state where the shutters 801a and 801b are in the open position and the screen of the display device 41 is not shielded.
Next, before moving to the 3D display, each lighting unit 81 to 84 is controlled to move and blink in the order of lamp group D → lamp group C → lamp group B → lamp group A. FIG. Abbreviated.

Next, the process proceeds to a scene C2, and the shutters 801a and 801b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 shield (close) the front side of the display device 41 for a short time. Based on the signal from the microcomputer 311, the parallax barrier 702B is switched from invalid to valid. At this time, the image for the left eye and the image for the right eye are different images, and thus the image of the liquid crystal display 701 is displayed in 3D.
Next, as shown in the scene C3, the shutters 801a and 801b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 move left and right so as to release the shielding (closing) on the front side of the display device 41 (the parallax barrier 702B is effective), Thereafter, as shown in the scene C4, the shutters 801a and 801b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 completely release the shielding (closing) on the front side of the display device 41 and open left and right. At this time, the parallax barrier 702B is effective, whereby the 3D display image of the liquid crystal display 701 becomes visible to the player, and an effect in 3D display is performed. In the example of the scene C4, the reach design of “7, changing, 7” is performed in 3D display.

The shutter accessory mechanism 801 shields the entire screen on the front side of the display device 41 with the shutters 801a and 801b as shown in FIG. 111, but is not limited thereto.
That is, the shutter accessory mechanism may not shield the entire screen on the front side of the display device 41 with the shutter.
For example, the shutter of the shutter accessory mechanism may be configured to be smaller than the screen on the front side of the display device 41, or the shutter may have an opening.
In addition to the shutter accessory mechanism, for example, an accessory that falls from the top of the screen on the front side of the display device 41 to the center of the screen (a plate accessory with a model name designed, a character accessory related to the model, or the like). It may be. In other words, if an accessory having a certain size is actuated so as to shield the front side of the display device 41 (the entire screen may not be shielded), the above-mentioned discomfort on the screen at the time of switching the parallax barrier 702B can be realized. It can be prevented from giving to the player.

Here, the effects related to the operation of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 as described above (including the movement and blinking of the illumination units 81 to 84) are summarized as follows.
(1) The shutters 801a and 801b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 are movable so as to be in a closed state (a state in which the front side of the display device 41 is blocked) before the parallax barrier 702B is effectively switched and 3D display is started. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn by the movement of the shutter accessory mechanism 801, and it can be prevented that the start of the subsequent 3D display is missed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
(2) By associating the movement of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 with the 3D display of the display device 41, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a 3D display will be achieved (there is a sense of expectation for a big hit). , Can enhance the interest of the game.

(3) The shutters 801a and 801b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 move so as to be in a closed state (a state in which the front side of the display device 41 is shielded) when the parallax barrier 702B is effectively switched. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable on the screen at the time of switching. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable on the screen when switching from 2D display to 3D display.
(4) Since the sound effects of the upper speaker 12a and the lower speaker 12b are output when the shutters 801a and 801b of the shutter accessory mechanism 801 move, it is possible to attract the player's attention and start 3D display further. Can raise the sense of expectation.
(5) Before shifting to the 3D display, each lighting unit 81 to 84 is turned on / off once in the order of lamp group D → lamp group C → lamp group B → lamp group A in a short time. The decoration control is repeated twice. At this time, immediately after the display area peripheral illumination unit 81 (lamp group A) located closest to the display device 41 is turned on / off once, before the second on / off is started. In addition, the shutter accessory mechanism 801 moves the shutters 801a and 801b for a short time to shield the front side of the display device 41, and then separates the shutters 801a and 801b to the left and right to shield the front side of the display device 41. Since it operates so as to be released, it is possible to draw the player's attention in conjunction with the decoration effect of each of the lighting units 81 to 84, and to prevent the subsequent 3D display effect from being missed.

In addition, the inventive concept of the above-described configuration relating to the shutter accessory mechanism 801 that is linked to the decoration effects of the illumination units 81 to 84 is expressed as follows.
The production control device
A decoration effect control means for effecting decoration for a plurality of lighting groups arranged on the front side of the gaming machine,
The decoration effect control means includes:
When the effect control means displaces the shielding means to shield the front surface of the effect means, and then returns the shielding means to a state where it is retracted from the front surface of the effect means, a plurality of illumination groups are provided according to the displacement of the shielding means. A game machine characterized by controlling decoration effects.

<Modified example of shutter accessory mechanism>
Next, in FIG. 111, a scene D1 shows a first modification of the shutter accessory mechanism.
In the first modification, when the shutters 802a and 802b of the shutter accessory mechanism 802 (shielding means) shield (close) the front side of the display device 41, a visual recognition opening 802c is formed. Yes.
Note that the shutter accessory mechanism 802 controls the opening and closing of the shutters 802 a and 802 b based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300.
Even in the state where the shutters 802a and 802b of the shutter accessory mechanism 802 shield the screen of the display device 41, only the fourth symbol Z4 on the screen is visible through the visual recognition opening 802c.
At this time, when the predetermined visual opening 802c is provided to display the fourth symbol Z4, 2D display is appropriate for the display of the fourth symbol Z4 corresponding to the visual recognition opening 802c. This is because in the 2D display, the parallax barrier 702B is invalid and the screen looks bright, and the fourth symbol Z4 can be clearly confirmed.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
An opening is formed in the shielding means,
The opening is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is formed at a position where the 4th symbol displayed on the effect means can be visually recognized when the shielding means is displaced to a position where the front face of the effect means is shielded.

Next, in FIG. 111, a scene D2 shows a second modification of the shutter accessory mechanism.
In the second modified example, when the shutters 803a and 803b of the shutter accessory mechanism 803 (shielding means) shield (close) the front side of the display device 41, a visual recognition opening 803c is formed. Yes.
Note that the shutter accessory mechanism 803 controls the opening and closing of the shutters 803 a and 803 b based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300.
Even in the state where the shutters 803a and 803b of the shutter accessory mechanism 803 shield the screen of the display device 41, only the fourth symbol Z4 on the screen is visible through the visual recognition opening 803c.
At this time, when a predetermined visual opening 803c is provided to display the fourth symbol Z4, 2D display is appropriate for the display of the fourth symbol Z4 corresponding to the visual opening 803c. This is because in the 2D display, the parallax barrier 702B is invalid and the screen looks bright, and the fourth symbol Z4 can be clearly confirmed.
Further, in the second modification, not only can the fourth symbol Z4 on the screen be visible through the visual recognition opening 803c, but also a mark indicating the 3D proper visual recognition position on the screen arranged on both sides of the fourth symbol Z4. M4 is also visible. The player has an advantage that the 3D display image can be seen more appropriately by gazing at the mark M4. That is, the mark M4 serves as an aid for collecting the line of sight at the 3D proper visual recognition position.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
An opening is formed in the shielding means,
The opening is
When the shielding means is displaced to a position that shields the front surface of the rendering means, the auxiliary image indicating the appropriate viewing position of the 3D display is also formed at a position where it can be visually recognized together with the fourth graphic displayed on the rendering means. Characteristic gaming machine

Next, FIG. 112 is a timing chart showing the parallax barrier switching instruction timing during 3D display.
As shown in FIG. 112, when a 3D drawing instruction is output from the main control microcomputer 311 of the presentation control device 300 to the VDP 312 at timing t1, the liquid crystal display 701 of the display device 41 is immediately displayed in 3D. Instead, 3D display is actually started at timing t2 in the next frame.
That is, at the same time when the 3D drawing instruction is output from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 to the VDP 312 at the timing t1, the switch liquid crystal 702 displays the parallax based on the signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. The barrier 702B is controlled to be invalid, so that the liquid crystal display 701 displays an image of the current frame of 2D display.
On the other hand, the liquid crystal display 701 updates an image for each frame, and the frame update period is 33 ms (33 ms is an approximate value, which is an example. The same applies hereinafter). For example, another value may be used as the frame update period instead of 33 ms.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 112, at timing t <b> 2 that is the start start point of the next frame after 33 ms has elapsed from the current frame of the liquid crystal display 701, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 applies to the switch liquid crystal 702. A switching instruction for switching the parallax barrier 702B from invalid to valid is issued. As a result, the switch liquid crystal 702 switches the parallax barrier 702B from invalid to effective based on a switching instruction signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. Therefore, the liquid crystal display 701 is switched to 3D display from the start timing t2 of the next frame, and an effect by 3D display is performed. Thereafter, the display state of the current frame continues until an instruction to switch to the next parallax barrier 702B is issued.
The main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 includes a CPU that performs overall control of the effect control device 300, and outputs a signal from the CPU to enable / disable the parallax barrier 702B with the switch liquid crystal 702. It is configured.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
A display state changing means for switching the parallax barrier between invalid and valid to control to 2D display or 3D display;
Image rendering means for generating display data to be displayed on the rendering means,
When performing the screen display of the rendering means, the display data is output from the image rendering means to the rendering means to render the screen, and the display state changing means switches the parallax barrier between valid and invalid with the switch liquid crystal, and 2D A gaming machine that performs display or 3D display.

In the image control system of the existing (conventional) display device, in order to display an image, the main control microcomputer (CPU) of the effect control device issues a command to the VDP, and the VDP outputs display data to the liquid crystal display. It is supposed to be. In order to enable 3D display, when controlling a display device having a switch liquid crystal for 3D display (with a built-in parallax barrier), the existing VDP does not have a circuit for controlling the switch liquid crystal.
Therefore, it is necessary to newly manufacture a VDP having a circuit for controlling the switch liquid crystal. However, in this case, a VDP having a circuit dedicated to 3D display control may be required or the cost may be increased.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the timing of the 3D drawing instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 and the switching instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 to the switch liquid crystal 702 of the production control device 300 is set to a predetermined time (1 for drawing). By shifting the frame, the existing CPU (for example, the main control microcomputer 311) and the VDP can control the 3D display without increasing the cost.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display state changing means is
It is configured to include a CPU that performs overall control of the effect control device,
A gaming machine characterized in that a signal is output from the CPU and the parallax barrier is switched between enabled and disabled by a switch liquid crystal.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The CPU of the production control device
A gaming machine characterized by outputting the signal for switching the parallax barrier between enabled and disabled by a switch liquid crystal after a predetermined time from instructing the image drawing means to perform 3D display drawing.

Here, the effects related to the configuration in which the timing of the 3D drawing instruction and the switching instruction to the switch liquid crystal 702 is shifted by one frame as described above are summarized as follows.
(1) By shifting the timing of the 3D drawing instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 to the VDP 312 and the switching instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 to the switch liquid crystal 702 by a predetermined time (one frame for drawing). Even with an existing CPU (for example, the main control microcomputer 311) and VDP, 3D display can be controlled without increasing the cost.
This background will be described.
In the conventional (existing) display device image control system, in order to display an image, the main control microcomputer (CPU) of the effect control device issues a command to the VDP, and the VDP outputs display data to the liquid crystal display. It was.
However, in order to enable 3D display, when a display device having a switch liquid crystal for 3D display (with a built-in parallax barrier) is controlled, the existing VDP has no circuit for controlling the switch liquid crystal.
Therefore, it is necessary to newly manufacture a VDP having a circuit for controlling the switch liquid crystal. However, in this case, a VDP having a circuit dedicated to 3D display control may be necessary or the cost may be increased.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the timing of the 3D drawing instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 and the switching instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 to the switch liquid crystal 702 of the production control device 300 is set to a predetermined time (1 for drawing). By shifting the frame), both the 3D drawing instruction and the switching instruction to the switch liquid crystal 702 can be controlled only by the main control microcomputer 311, and a new circuit for 3D display is not required, and the cost is reduced. be able to.
That is, in the present embodiment, the display device 41 capable of displaying 3D can be easily controlled by the configuration including the main control microcomputer 311 (CPU) and the VDP 312 of the effect control device 300.

(2) Since both the 3D drawing instruction and the switching instruction to the switch liquid crystal 702 can be controlled only by the main control microcomputer 311, an image control system for the display device 41 capable of displaying 3D can be efficiently developed. Can be manufactured.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with the display device 41 capable of displaying a 3D display that can be efficiently developed and manufactured.

Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the rendering operation when the structure of the rendering control table for 2D display and 3D display is the same (data structure in which the number of stages corresponding to the rendering type row is combined).
In FIG. 113, the screen of the display unit 41a in the display device 41 is represented by reference symbols E1 to E6 and reference symbols F2 to F6.
First, as shown in the screen E1, when the special figure variation is “7, during variation, 7”, the reach design effect is performed in 2D display, the 2D display effect continues thereafter. In this case, a 2D display effect from the screen E2 to the screen E6 is performed. On the other hand, when switching to a 3D display effect, the 3D display effect from the screen F2 to the screen F6 is performed. It should be noted that the black circle in each screen in FIG. 113 represents the special figure start memory.
Which one to select for 2D display or 3D display is, for example, when the player operates the switch button 15 (user selection mode) or when the display is automatically switched by the effect of the game progress (internal selection mode). is there.
113 is based on the 2D effect control table 1 in FIG. 106 and the 3D effect control table 1 in FIG. 107 described above, in which the structures of the effect control tables for 2D display and 3D display are the same. Done.

First, the case where the 2D display effect is continued will be described (2D mode selection effect pattern 1).
In this case, the route is from the screen E1 to the screen E2, and thereafter, all effects are performed in 2D display up to the screen E6. On the screen E2, the scroll appears during the reach design of “7, changing, 7”, and the effect of starting to drop downward at the position where the scroll remains closed from the top is started. Next, on the screen E3, the scroll is further dropped at the position where it is closed, and on the screen E4, the scroll is opened.
Next, on the screen E5, an effect is applied to the opened scroll, and a powerful performance is performed. Here, the effect that a specific character K1 (for example, a tiger) appears on the front side of the scroll opened as an effect is added. It should be noted that the effect is applied on this screen E5, and the number of stages corresponding to the line of the same effect type is applied, and in the case of 3D display, an effect in which a specific character K1 (eg, tiger) jumps out in three dimensions is performed. This is to make it a directing.
Next, on the screen E6, an effect that a second character K2 (for example, a bear) appears in addition to the character K1 on the front side of the opened scroll is added.

Next, the case where the 2D display screen E1 is shifted to the 3D display effect will be described (3D mode selection effect pattern 1).
In this case, the route is from the screen E1 to the screen F2, and thereafter, all effects are performed in 3D display up to the screen F6.
When the screen F2 is shifted to, the reach design effect “7, changing (3, 2), 7” is displayed in 3D, and a three-dimensional effect is performed. In FIG. 113, since it is difficult to display a truly three-dimensional image due to space limitations, the image is illustrated in a three-dimensional range within the range that can be understood (the same applies to the screens F2 to F6).
Next, on the screen F3, an effect in which two closed scrolls appear during the change in reach is displayed in 3D display. On the screen F4, an effect in which the two scrolls are opened is displayed in 3D display.
Next, in the screen F5, an effect that a specific character K1 (for example, a tiger) jumps out on the front side of the scroll positioned forward is added in 3D display. In this screen F5, the number of steps corresponding to the same effect type line is applied, and in the case of 2D display, a specific character K1 (for example, a tiger) is applied to be consistent with the case of the effect of 2D display. Taking sex.
Next, on the screen F6, an effect in which a second character K2 (for example, a bear) appears in addition to the character K1 on the front side of the scroll that is also opened is added in 3D display.

In this way, the structure of the 2D display and 3D display effect control tables is the same (a data structure in which the number of stages corresponding to the effect type row is combined), and in the same line effect (here, screen E5 and screen F5), In the 3D mode, an effect that the character K1 jumps out in a specific scene is performed, and in the 2D mode, an effect (effect in which the character K1 appears) is added instead of the effect that pops out.
Therefore, since the player can select the 2D mode or the 3D mode, even a person who is difficult to see the 3D display can enjoy the 2D display.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
A display state changing means for switching the parallax barrier between invalid and valid to control to 2D display or 3D display;
Table setting means for setting an effect control table corresponding to the effect contents of the effect means;
Effect content determining means for determining the effect content of the effect means based on the effect control table of the table setting means,
Provide a switch button that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display,
The display state changing means includes
Based on the operation of the switch button, the display state of the effect means is switched to 2D display or 3D display,
The production content determination means includes
When switched to 3D display based on the effect control table, the 3D display screen performs an effect that the symbols and characters jump out in a specific scene,
When switched to 2D display, a game machine is characterized in that the content of an effect is determined so as to perform an effect in which an effect is added instead of an effect in which a symbol or character jumps out in a specific scene on a 2D display screen.

The inventive concept when the contents of the table setting means are limited is expressed as follows.
The table setting means includes
An effect control table is set separately for the effect control table for 2D display and the effect control table for 3D display.
In each production control table, data is arranged so that a plurality of production types performed in one variation display game are sequentially designated and executed,
For data of the same kind of effect type, arrange the data for the effect that the pattern or character pops out in a specific scene on the 3D display screen,
A game machine comprising: data for performing an effect in which an effect is added instead of an effect in which a symbol or character jumps out in a specific scene on the 2D display screen in the same order.

In addition, when the presentation control device 300 performs the presentation on the screen of the display device 41, the command from the game control device 100 as the main board is the same regardless of the 2D mode or the 3D mode, that is, the command is analyzed. Since the variation pattern is common to 2D / 3D, in the effect control device 300, in the 3D mode, an effect that a pattern or character jumps out in a specific scene is performed.
In the 2D mode, only an effect (such as the appearance of a character) is added instead of the effect of jumping out, so that the player can enjoy the effect in both the 2D mode and the 3D mode, and the game control device 100 that is the main board and the effect control. The ROM capacity of the apparatus 300 (the capacity of the ROM 101B and the image ROM 322) is also suppressed, and there is an effect that the device 300 can be efficiently developed.

The background is as follows.
Since a 3D image is different in appearance and fatigue depending on a person (player), it is conceivable that the player selects a favorite image (2D image or 3D image).
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the player can operate the switching button 15 to select a favorite image (2D image or 3D image).
However, when a 2D image is selected, the player may feel unsatisfactory if there is no effect that the character or the like jumps out of the screen. Also, if another effect is prepared in 2D / 3D, the number of variation patterns, image data, etc. are required twice in the design, and the ROM capacity of the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 increases, resulting in an increase in cost.
Therefore, the variation pattern is common to 2D / 3D, and in 3D mode, a design or character jumps out in a specific scene, while in 2D mode, an effect (such as the appearance of a character) is added in place of the pop-out effect. -The above problem was solved by using a bull structure.
Therefore, the player does not feel unsatisfactory in the production regardless of whether the 2D mode or the 3D mode is selected. In addition, there is no need to prepare another effect in 2D / 3D, the number of variation patterns, image data, etc. are not required twice in the design, and an increase in the ROM capacity of the game control device 100 or the effect control device 300 is suppressed, and the cost You can prevent up.
In particular, since there is no need to prepare another effect in 2D / 3D, it is possible to efficiently develop control related to the effect.

Furthermore, since the game control apparatus 100 shares the 2D display and 3D display symbol variation patterns, there is an advantage that the control efficiency is good.
On the other hand, the effect control apparatus 300 has 2D display and 3D display symbol variation patterns as the effect control table, but only the effect corresponding to the 2D display is added to the portion corresponding to the 3D display, so the ROM capacity (the image ROM 322 (Capacity) does not increase too much.
Further, the structure of the effect control table shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 has an effect that the 2D / 3D switching process can be efficiently performed.

Next, FIG. 114 is a timing chart of valid / invalid control of the switch button 15 and the effect button 9.
When the effect of the display device 41 (indicated as “effect state” in FIG. 114) is performed in 3D display, when the change button 15 is operated (pressed) at timing t11, the changeover switch 48 shown in FIG. (Switch SW in FIG. 114) is turned on, which is input to the switch input circuit 336 of the effect control device 300, and information that the switch 48 is turned on is transmitted from the switch input circuit 336 to the main control microcomputer 311. Therefore, a switching instruction for switching the parallax barrier 702B from valid to invalid is issued from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 to the switch liquid crystal 702. As a result, the switch liquid crystal 702 switches the parallax barrier 702B from valid to invalid based on a switching instruction signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. Therefore, the liquid crystal display 701 is switched to 2D display from the start timing of the next frame (however, since it is very short at 33 ms, and immediately shifts to the next frame), an effect by 2D display is performed. Thereafter, 2D display continues until an instruction to switch to the next parallax barrier 702B is issued.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide a switch button that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display,
The display state changing means is
A gaming machine, wherein the display state of the effect means is switched based on an operation of the switching button.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 114, the changeover button 15 is immediately re-operated (pressed again) to turn on the changeover switch 48, which is input to the switch input circuit 336 of the effect control device 300, and the switch input circuit 336. Even if the information that the changeover switch 48 is turned on is transmitted to the main control microcomputer 311, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 disables the operation of the changeover button 15 for a predetermined time (here, 1 second). In the upper part, the control is performed so that the operation of the switch button 15 is disabled by disabling the operation of the switch 48.
That is, even when the changeover button 15 is operated and the changeover switch 48 is turned on, a changeover button invalid period (the predetermined time (one second)) that treats the operation of the changeover button 15 as invalid is provided. Therefore, even if the switch button 15 is pressed within the predetermined time, it is not reflected in the control.
Therefore, even if the button 15 is repeatedly pressed after the switch button 15 is pressed once, for example, the operation of the switch 48 is invalidated within the predetermined time, so that the operation of the switch button 15 is treated as invalid. It is not reflected in the production control. When the predetermined time elapses, the switching button invalid period is canceled and the switching button valid period is reached. When the switch button valid period is reached, when the switch button 15 is operated, the switch 48 is turned on, and when the information is received by the main control microcomputer 311 via the switch input circuit 336, the main control microcomputer 311 receives the change switch. By enabling the operation of 48, the operation of the switching button 15 is treated as effective, and effect control is performed.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide a switch button that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display,
The production control device
A gaming machine, wherein after a switching button is operated, the operation of the switching button is invalidated for a predetermined period.

When the change button 15 is operated at the timing t11, the change switch 48 shown in FIG. 6 is turned on, which is input to the switch input circuit 336 of the effect control device 300, and the change switch 48 is turned on from the switch input circuit 336. Information is transmitted to the main control microcomputer 311, but at this time, the main control microcomputer 311 directs the operation of the effect button 9 for a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds) based on the information that the changeover switch 48 is turned on. Control to invalidate the operation of the button switch 46 is performed. That is, control is performed that treats the operation of the effect button 9 as invalid (in terms of control, the operation of the effect button 9 is invalidated by invalidating the operation of the effect button switch 46).
Therefore, when the effect button 9 is pressed and the effect button switch 46 is turned on, even if the information is received by the main control microcomputer 311 via the switch input circuit 336, the main control microcomputer 311 operates the effect button switch 46. By invalidating the operation, the operation of the effect button 9 is treated as invalid (it becomes an invalid period even if the effect button 9 is not pressed), and is not reflected in the effect control.
In other words, in conjunction with the operation of the switch button 15, an effect button invalid period (the predetermined time (0.5 seconds)) in which the operation of the effect button 9 is invalid is provided. Therefore, even if the effect button 9 is pressed within the predetermined time, it is not reflected at all in the control. When the effect button invalid period elapses, the operation of the effect button 9 becomes valid.

As described above, when the effect of the display device 41 is 3D display, when the switch button 15 is pressed, the effect state is immediately switched to 2D display, but the operation of the switch button 15 is invalid (change switch) within a predetermined time (1 second). 48 is invalid). At the same time, an effect button invalid period (0.5 seconds) for invalidating the operation of the effect button 9 is provided in conjunction with the operation timing of the switching button 15, and during this time, even if the effect button 9 is pressed, it is treated as invalid.
This is because after the switch button 15 is operated, the operation of the switch button 15 (operation of the switch 48) is invalidated for a predetermined time (1 second), and the operation of the effect button 9 is also performed for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds). This is for the purpose of preventing the production button 9 from being intentionally operated, for example, in combination with the continuous hitting of the switching button 15 by disabling it.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A switching button capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display;
A production button that can participate in the production of the display device within a certain range,
The production control device
A gaming machine, wherein the operation of the effect button is invalidated for a predetermined period after the switch button is operated.

Next, an operation in which the operation of the switch button 15 is invalidated for a predetermined time after the operation of the effect button 9 will be described.
Now, when the effect of the display device 41 (indicated as “effect state” in FIG. 114) is performed in 2D display, when the effect button 9 is operated (pressed) at timing t12, the effect shown in FIG. The button switch 46 is turned on, which is input to the switch input circuit 336 of the effect control device 300, and information that the effect button switch 46 is turned on is transmitted from the switch input circuit 336 to the main control microcomputer 311. At this time, the main control microcomputer 311 performs control for invalidating the operation of the changeover switch 48 for the operation of the changeover button 15 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) based on the information that the effect button switch 46 is turned on. . That is, when the changeover switch 48 is turned on by pressing the changeover button 15, even if the information is received by the main control microcomputer 311 via the switch input circuit 336, the operation of the changeover switch 48 is invalidated in the main control microcomputer 311. (Invalid period even if the switch button 15 is not pressed) and is not reflected in the production control. Therefore, by disabling the operation of the switching button switch 48, a switching button invalid period (the predetermined time (0.5 seconds)) for invalidating the operation of the switching button 15 is provided. That is, control is performed that treats the operation of the switching button 15 as invalid (in terms of control, invalidating the operation of the switching button 15 by invalidating the operation of the switching button switch 48).

In this way, in conjunction with the operation of the effect button 9, the switching button invalid period (the predetermined time (0.5 seconds)) in which the operation of the switching button 15 is invalid is provided. Therefore, even if the switch button 15 is pressed within the predetermined time, it is not reflected in the control. When the switching button invalid period elapses, the operation of the switching button 15 becomes valid.
For example, after the operation of the effect button 9, the operation of the changeover switch 48 is disabled for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds) and the operation of the switch button 15 is disabled. This is to prevent the switching button 15 from being operated intentionally.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A switching button capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display;
A production button that can participate in the production of the display device within a certain range,
The production control device
A gaming machine, wherein the operation of the switching button is invalidated for a predetermined period after the effect button is operated.

Here, the effects related to the 3D display notice effect, the operation of the effect button 9 and the switch button 15 are summarized as follows.
(1) In the effect control device 300, in the normal gaming state, the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 in the display device 41 is disabled and the effect is displayed on the screen of the 2D display, and the advance effect is developed from the reach fluctuation. Switches the display state of the liquid crystal display 701 to a state where 2D display is enabled by enabling the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 in the display device 41, and performs a 3D display notice effect that expects a big hit in this state.
In this case, when the parallax barrier 702B is activated, a part of the light path from the backlight 703 is blocked. Therefore, the liquid crystal display 701 appears to darken the entire screen for a moment, and the reach variation pattern is displayed. It looks unclear and the performance is clearly different from normal, and the player has a sense of expectation for the big hit.
Therefore, it is possible to enhance the quality of the performance by using the state in which the parallax barrier 702B is enabled and the liquid crystal display 701 is displayed in 2D, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

(2) By using the parallax barrier 702B to enable the liquid crystal display 701 in a 2D display state for a 3D display notice effect that expects a hit (including small hits other than big hits, mid hits, etc.), some benefits The player can have a sense of expectation of giving.
(3) In a state where the parallax barrier 702B is enabled and the liquid crystal display 701 is displayed in 2D, a premium image (for example, a cherry blossom pattern or the like) is displayed in a state where it is not clearly visible, thereby enhancing the presentation value of the premium image. It is possible to give the player the satisfaction of encountering the premium image.

(4) Normally, the state in which the parallax barrier 702B is enabled and the liquid crystal display 701 is displayed in 2D has a sense of incongruity. Therefore, it is an essential control to prevent such a state from occurring.
In the present embodiment, there is a unique effect that the player can have a sense of expectation that this uncomfortable feeling "something may happen" by using this unusual state in reverse.
For example, at the time of reach production, there are cases where the screen of the display device becomes black (blackout), but this is an effect that gives an uncomfortable feeling by using an unusual state in reverse, In the present embodiment, such an unusual and sophisticated sense of performance can be produced.
(5) In addition, when the parallax barrier 702B is enabled and the liquid crystal display 701 is displayed in 2D, a premium image (for example, an intense heat image such as a cherry blossom pattern) is displayed in a state where it cannot be clearly seen. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that “it may be a hit”.

(6) A switching button 15 capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display is provided, and the display state of the display device 41 is switched to 2D display or 3D display based on the operation of the switching button 15.
Therefore, the player can easily switch to 2D display or 3D display, which is convenient. In addition, 3D display is tired when viewed for a long time, or 3D display is different in how it looks and tires depending on the person, but it can be changed to a desired display state by operating the switching button 15, so that the player's preference Can be along.

(7) After the switching button 15 capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display is operated, the operation of the switching button 15 is disabled for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).
Therefore, for example, it is possible to appropriately deal with a situation such as continuous hitting of the switching button 15 and avoid an adverse effect on the production.
That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles by intentionally operating the switching button 15 frequently (overlapping).
(8) A switch button 15 that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display, and an effect button 9 that can be involved in an effect on the display device 41 within a certain range are provided. The operation of the effect button 9 is invalidated during a period (for example, 0.5 seconds).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production button 9 from being operated intentionally together with, for example, the continuous hitting of the switching button 15.
(9) The switch button 15 that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display and the effect button 9 that can participate in the effect of the display device 41 within a certain range are provided. The operation of the switching button 15 is invalidated during a period (for example, 5 seconds).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the switching button 15 from being operated intentionally together with, for example, the continuous hitting of the effect button 9.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by intentionally frequently (overlapping) the switching button 15 and the effect button 9.

Next, FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an operation example of the effect screen when the switching button 15 and the effect button 9 are operated.
In FIG. 115, the screen of the display unit 41a in the display device 41 is represented by reference numerals G1 to G3.
First, as shown in the screen G1, when the special figure variation is a design effect of “1, 2, 3” and is performed in 2D display, the display “2D mode” is displayed at the top of the screen G1. As a result, the player can easily understand whether the current performance is in 2D mode or 3D mode. Further, a display of (switching) is displayed in an ellipse at the lower part of the screen G1, and this indicates that the operation of the switching button 15 is in an effective state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the operation of pressing the switching button 15 is currently effective. The display of (switching) is displayed only when the operation of the switching button 15 is valid, and is not displayed when the operation is invalid. When the switching button 15 is pressed, the display of (switching) disappears for a predetermined time (1 second).

As described above, the state in which the operation of the switch button 15 is invalid means a predetermined time (one second) after the switch button 15 is pressed once, and the operation of the switch 48 after the operation of the effect button 9 for a predetermined time. There are two periods for invalidating only (0.5 seconds), and during those periods, the operation of the switching button 15 is invalidated, and (switching) is not displayed.
Further, since the switching button 15 is arranged on the left side (left side in the vicinity of the upper plate 7) at the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the display of (switching) is arranged on the left side at the lower part of the screen G1 so as to match with this. ing. Therefore, there is an advantage that the display of (switching) is easy for the player to understand.
In the screen G1, the white circle represents the special figure 1 hold display, and the black circle represents the special figure 2 hold display (the same applies to the screen G2 and the screen G3).

  Next, when the player presses the switch button 15 when the special figure variation is a design effect of “1, 2, 3” and is performed in 2D display, the effect of 2D display to 3D display Can be switched to. As a result, as shown in the screen G2, the display at the top of the screen is changed from “2D mode” to “3D mode”, and the symbol “1, 2, 3” is changed from 2D display to 3D display. In addition, after a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed after the switch button 15 is pressed, a display of (switch) appears again (screen G2 shows after 1 second has elapsed).

Next, as shown in the screen G3, when the reach variation of “1, changing, 1” occurs in the state of the 3D mode effect, and (PUSH) is displayed at the center of the screen, this (PUSH) display is The operation of the effect button 9 is effective, and the display also has a function as a notice effect. The indication (PUSH) is drawn in a substantially circular line.
In addition, an arrow appears below the display of (PUSH), and a guidance display suggesting the location of the effect button 9 is obtained. Since the effect button 9 is located almost at the center of the pachinko machine 1, the display “PUSH” is also displayed on the center of the screen G3, so that it is easy for the player to understand.
When the player presses the effect button 9, there is a period during which the operation of the changeover switch 48 is invalidated for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds) after the operation of the effect button 9. (Switching) is displayed.

Next, FIG. 116 is a timing chart showing the operation of the pachinko machine 1 when the power failure is restored.
In FIG. 116, when the effect of the display device 41 (indicated as “effect state” in FIG. 116) is performed in 2D display, when the switching button 15 is operated (pressed), the details are omitted as described above. However, the screen of the display device 41 is switched from 2D display to 3D display, and an effect is performed.
Even if the switch button 15 is pressed to switch from 2D display to 3D display (that is, even if the display mode selected by the user is in the 3D display state), the image of the display device 41 depends on the progress of the effect. Since there are a 3D display section and a 2D display section, the parallax barrier 702B may not be switched from invalid to effective immediately. However, since the description of FIG. An example is given in which 702B is switched from invalid to valid, and the screen of the display device 41 is immediately changed from 2D display to 3D display to produce an effect.
In addition, for a predetermined time (one second) after the switch button 15 is pressed once, there is a switch button invalid period in which the operation of the switch button 15 is invalidated by invalidating the operation of the switch 48 as described above. When the predetermined time elapses, the switching button invalid period is canceled and the operation of the switching button 15 becomes valid.

Now, if a power failure occurs at timing t21 while the display device 41 is producing a special figure in 3D display, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the data in the RAM 101C of the game control device 100 is backed up. The operation of all the devices of the pachinko machine 1 is stopped.
Thereafter, after a power failure, the commercial power supply is restored at timing t22, and when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started, the pachinko machine 1 is activated. Then, programs such as the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are activated. In the production control device 300, the program starts from the power-on reset process shown in FIG. At this time, initial setting of the CPU is performed in step D2, and initial setting of the VDP 312 is performed in step D3.
In the initial setting of the VDP 312, a setting for starting the screen of the display device 41 from 2D display is also performed.

Next, an interrupt is permitted in step D4, and the main process in step D5 is started. When the main process is started, for example, a process of editing the screen of the display device 41 into a 2D display is performed in the effect display editing process in step D24. At this time, the first screen is to edit the power failure recovery screen, and then the screen is restored to the screen when the power failure occurs. This is a 2D display screen. The power failure recovery screen is used for proper visual alignment.
When the player is not playing a game, the screen when a power failure occurs is a customer waiting screen. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is restored, the screen goes through the power failure recovery screen and then the customer waiting screen. In this case, the power failure recovery screen and the customer waiting screen are 2D display screens.
Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is restored, the screen of the display device 41 is initially a 2D display power failure recovery screen, and thereafter the screen is restored to the screen at the time of the power failure, which is restored on the 2D display screen. .

Thus, even if the display device 41 is in 3D display when a power failure occurs, the screen of the display device 41 becomes 2D display when the power failure is restored, and the production is started.
In the example of FIG. 116, the display device 41 is in 3D display when a power failure occurs. However, even if the display device 41 is in 2D display when a power failure occurs, the screen of the display device 41 is rendered from the 2D display when the power failure is restored. Configure to get started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 116, when the switch button 15 is recovered from the power failure at timing t22, the operation of the switch 48 is disabled even if the switch button 15 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Thus, a switch button invalid period during which the operation of the switch button 15 is invalid is provided, and the operation of the switch button 15 is invalid during that period. Then, after a predetermined time elapses, the switching button invalid period is canceled and the operation of the switching button 15 becomes valid.

As described above, when the power failure is restored, the effect of the screen of the display device 41 is started from the 2D display, and the operation of the switching button 15 is invalidated only during the switching button invalid period from the time of restoration of the power failure.
This is because the screen of the display device 41 at the time of power failure recovery is set to 2D display, and the 2D mode or 3D mode can be selected in accordance with the start of the game after using the first power failure recovery screen for proper visual alignment as described above. In order to do this, a switching button invalid period is provided. The power failure recovery screen is used for proper visual alignment when the switch button is disabled.
It should be noted that the operation of the switch button 15 is not enabled after the switch button invalid period has elapsed, but may be enabled, for example, after the power failure recovery screen ends, or immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is restored. The operation may be validated.
Further, when information such as “I like 3D” is recorded as player information on a recording medium such as a game card, the operation of the switch button 15 is performed immediately after the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure. May be set to be effective.

This embodiment has the following effects.
(1) Since the display state of the display device 41 is switched to 2D display or 3D display based on a predetermined switching command (for example, the display mode (display m) of the advance notice operation table 1A, the operation of the switching button 15). It is possible to enhance the fun of gaming.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The production control device
Comprising display state changing means for controlling the effect means to 2D display or 3D display;
The display state changing means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the display state of the effect means is switched based on a predetermined switching command.

The inventive concept when the parallax barrier 702B is configured to be switched between enabled and disabled by the switch liquid crystal 702 is expressed as follows.
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The display state changing means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the parallax barrier is switched to invalid / valid and the rendering means is controlled to 2D display or 3D display, and the display state of the rendering means is switched based on a predetermined switching command.

(2) Since the switching button 15 capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display is provided, and the display state of the display device 41 is switched to 2D display or 3D display based on the operation of the switching button 15, the player's It is convenient to switch to 2D display or 3D display with a simple operation. That is, since the player can select 2D display or 3D display, even a person who is difficult to see the 3D display can enjoy the 2D display.
In addition, 3D display is tired when viewed for a long time, or 3D display is different in how it looks and tires depending on the person, but it can be changed to a desired display state by operating the switching button 15, so that the player's preference Can be along.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide a switch button that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display,
The display state changing means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the display state of the effect means is switched based on an operation of the switching button.

(3) Since the operation of the switching button 15 is disabled for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the switching button 15 capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display is operated, for example, It is possible to appropriately deal with situations such as repeated hits and avoid adverse effects on the production.
That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles by intentionally operating the switching button 15 frequently (overlapping).
This background will be described.
In the case of a gaming machine provided with a 2D / 3D display switching button, if the player deliberately and continuously operates this switching button, the control of the performance cannot be handled smoothly, and there is a problem in the progress of the performance. There is a fear.
In addition, since the game machine has a push button for production (production button), if the 2D / 3D display switching button and the production push button are operated at the same time, the production control cannot be handled well. , There is a risk of problems in the production.
Therefore, there is a need for countermeasures that do not cause problems even if the player performs a continuous operation of a 2D / 3D display switching button or a push button for effects, etc., or that the player does not perform an operation that induces the problem. It is done.
Therefore, in this embodiment, after the switching button 15 is operated, the operation of the switching button 15 is invalidated for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the switching button 15 is repeatedly hit, an adverse effect on the production can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause problems in production.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide a switch button that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display,
The production control device
A gaming machine, wherein the operation of the switch button is invalidated for a predetermined period after the switch button is operated.

(4) A switch button 15 that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display, and an effect button 9 that can be involved in an effect on the display device 41 within a certain range are provided. Since the operation of the effect button 9 is invalidated during the period (for example, 0.5 seconds), even if the effect button 9 is intentionally operated together with the operation of the switch button 15, for example, avoiding an adverse effect on the effect Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a production defect caused by intentionally frequently (overlapping) the switch 15 and the production button 9, that is, a gaming machine equipped with a display device 41 capable of displaying a 3D display ( A pachinko machine 1) can be provided that does not suffer from problems due to operation of the switching button 15 for 2D / 3D display and the push button (production button) for production.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A switching button capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display;
A production button that can participate in the production of the display device within a certain range,
The production control device
A gaming machine, wherein the operation of the effect button is invalidated for a predetermined period after the switch button is operated.

(5) A switch button 15 that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display, and an effect button 9 that can be involved in an effect on the display device 41 within a certain range are provided. Since the operation of the switching button 15 is invalidated during a period (for example, 5 seconds), even if the switching button 15 is deliberately operated in combination with, for example, consecutive hitting of the effect button 9, an adverse effect on the effect can be avoided. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a production failure caused by intentionally frequently (overlapping) the switch 15 and the production button 9. The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A switching button capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display;
A production button that can participate in the production of the display device within a certain range,
The production control device
A gaming machine, wherein the operation of the switching button is invalidated for a predetermined period after the effect button is operated.

(6) The switch button 15 that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display and the effect button 9 that can be involved in the effect of the display device 41 within a certain range are provided, and after the switch button 15 is operated, The operation of the switch button 15 is invalidated for one predetermined period (for example, 1 second), and the operation of the effect button 9 is invalidated for the second predetermined period (for example, 0.5 second). Even if the effect button 9 is intentionally operated in conjunction with the operation of the switch button 15 or the change button 15, adverse effects on the effect can be avoided. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a production failure caused by intentionally frequently (overlapping) the switch 15 and the production button 9. The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A switching button capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display;
A production button that can participate in the production of the display device within a certain range,
The production control device
After the switch button is operated, the game machine is characterized in that the operation of the switch button is invalidated for a first predetermined period and the operation of the effect button is invalidated for a second predetermined period.

(7) Since the display of (switching) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 to indicate that the operation of the switching button 15 is in a valid state, the player confirms that the operation of pressing the switching button 15 is currently valid. It is easy to recognize and convenient. In addition, the willingness to play is also improved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provide a switch button that can be switched to 2D display or 3D display,
The production control device
A gaming machine comprising switching button valid display means for displaying on the display device that the operation of the switching button is valid.

(8) Since (PUSH) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 to indicate that the operation of the effect button 9 is in an effective state, the player confirms that the operation of pressing the effect button 9 is currently effective. It is easy to recognize and convenient. In addition, the willingness to play is also improved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Providing a production button that can be involved in the production of the display device within a certain range,
The production control device
An amusement machine characterized by comprising effect button effective display means for displaying on the display device that the operation of the effect button is effective.

Further, the present embodiment has the following incidental effects.
(1) Since the unique ID (individual identification information) can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 (arithmetic processing unit) and at the same time, each gaming machine can be identified, the unique ID as in this embodiment. Is output to the outside (for example, the management device 140) to determine the legitimacy, it is possible for a gaming store to manage individual gaming machines, and an unauthorized person is illegal with respect to each arithmetic processing device. There is an effect that security is improved because remodeling must be performed.
Further, as in this embodiment, the game program created for each model and written in the arithmetic processing unit is provided with a function for outputting this unique ID, so that the output form and output of the unique ID can be made by changing the game program. Timing and other improvements and changes can be made quickly and inexpensively.

Next, a modification of the present embodiment will be described.
(1) After the operation of the switching button 15 capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display, a predetermined effect (for example, “3D display”) in the switched display mode (either 2D display or 3D display) The operation of the switching button 15 may be validated on the condition that a “mode change complete” screen or the like appears.
With this configuration, an effect in the switched display mode (for example, 3D display mode) can always be shown, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by intentionally frequently (overlapping) the switching button 15 and the effect button 9.
Further, the player can easily recognize an effective push button operation (the operation of pressing the switching button 15 is effective).

(2) When the switch button 15 is operated again within the switch button invalid period (FIG. 114), the switch button invalid period (for example, 1 second) is extended (for example, extended for 10 seconds) to force Alternatively, a penalty such as 2D display may be provided.
With this configuration, the player can be recognized so as not to push the switch button 15 unnecessarily.

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) As long as the gaming machine uses pachinko balls to play a game, the gaming machine is not limited to the example as in the embodiment but can be applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine.
(2) Moreover, it is only necessary to provide a display device capable of displaying a decoration special figure as a gaming machine, and thus can be widely applied to general gaming machines provided with a video device such as a liquid crystal display.
(3) The display device only needs to be able to change the display content, and the image may be configured to change the screen content by character display, video display, or the like.
(4) The display device is not limited to a display device using liquid crystal, and may have any configuration as long as it is a device capable of 2D display and 3D display, for example.

Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In the above embodiment, the parallax barrier 702B is controlled by the liquid crystal switch 702, but this cannot be detected until the parallax barrier 702B has a defect.
Therefore, a first modification of the present invention in which a barrier sensor for detecting a defect of validity / invalidity of a parallax barrier is provided will be described.
117 (a) and 117 (b) are diagrams showing the configuration of the first modification of the present invention. In the description of this diagram, the same components as those in FIG.
117A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the display device 741 in the first modification, and FIG. 117B is a front view of the switch liquid crystal in the display device 741 in the first modification.
117 (a) and 117 (b), as described above, the display device 741 according to the first modification of the present invention has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, and also relates to a barrier sensor as described below. Is added as a new function.
That is, as shown in FIGS. 117A and 117B, the upper part on the right side of the front surface of the display device 741 in Modification 1 (specifically, the right side of the front surface of the display device 741 when the display device 741 is viewed from the player). A barrier sensor 711 is provided in the upper part). In addition, a backlight blocking layer 702S is provided on the upper part of the front side of the switch liquid crystal 702 (specifically, the upper right part of the front side of the switch liquid crystal 702 corresponding to the upper right part of the front side of the display device 41 when viewed from the player). Yes.

The backlight blocking layer 702S is a layer that can block the light of the backlight 703, and operates as follows in synchronization with the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier 702B.
When the parallax barrier 702B is valid: operates to block the light of the backlight 703. When the parallax barrier 702B is invalid: transparent (acts so that the light of the backlight 703 passes).
In the first modification, the switch liquid crystal 702 is configured to control the parallax barrier 702B to be valid / invalid based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 as in the first embodiment. The blocking layer 702S is also controlled to be valid / invalid based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 (synchronized with the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier 702B).

The barrier sensor 711 is disposed on the upper right side of the front surface of the display device 741 and can detect light emitted from the backlight 703. Specifically, when the parallax barrier 702B is normally enabled / disabled, the barrier sensor 711 operates so that the backlight blocking layer 702S passes the light of the backlight 703 when the parallax barrier 702B is disabled. 703 light is detected. On the other hand, when the parallax barrier 702B is valid, the backlight blocking layer 702S operates so as to block the light of the backlight 703, and thus the light of the backlight 703 is not detected.
In addition, when the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier 702B is abnormal and defective, the barrier sensor 711 does not perform the above-described operation. The detection signal of the barrier sensor 711 is input to the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, and the main control microcomputer 311 determines whether or not there is a defect in the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier 702B. Yes.

<Operation when the parallax barrier 702B is normal>
When the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 is effectively controlled, the parallax barrier 702B operates to block light and separate light corresponding to the left and right eyes.
Further, when the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 is controlled to be invalid, the parallax barrier 702B is transparent and transmits light so that the same light reaches the left and right eyes.
On the other hand, the backlight blocking layer 702S synchronizes with the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier 702B, blocks the light of the backlight 703 when the parallax barrier 702B is valid, and transparentizes and passes the light of the backlight 703 when the parallax barrier 702B is invalid. Operates to
Therefore, when the parallax barrier 702B performs a normal operation as described above, the barrier sensor 711 operates so that the backlight blocking layer 702S passes the light of the backlight 703 when the parallax barrier 702B is invalid. The light of the light 703 is detected. On the other hand, when the parallax barrier 702B is valid, the backlight blocking layer 702S operates so as to block the light of the backlight 703, and thus the light of the backlight 703 is not detected.

Therefore, the detection signal of the barrier sensor 711 is input to the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 (for example, input via a predetermined input circuit (not shown)), and the main control microcomputer 311 activates the parallax barrier 702B. It is possible to determine whether the parallax barrier 702B is normal or not by comparing the / invalid signal, the valid / invalid signal of the backlight blocking layer 702S, and the detection signal of the barrier sensor 711. For example, when the parallax barrier 702B is enabled, the backlight 703 operates so as to block the light, and the backlight blocking layer 702S operates so as to block the light of the backlight 703. If no light is detected, it is determined that the parallax barrier 702B is normal.
In addition, when the parallax barrier 702B is disabled, the barrier sensor 711 operates to pass the light of the backlight 703 and the backlight blocking layer 702S operates to pass the light of the backlight 703. If light is detected, it is determined that the parallax barrier 702B is normal.
Therefore, in the above example, the parallax barrier 702B is normal if it is determined by comparing the valid / invalid signal of the parallax barrier 702B, the valid / invalid signal of the backlight blocking layer 702S, and the detection signal of the barrier sensor 711. Can be determined.

<Operation at the time of malfunction of the parallax barrier 702B>
When the parallax barrier 702B is disabled, the barrier sensor 711 operates to pass the light of the backlight 703, and the backlight blocking layer 702S operates to pass the light of the backlight 703. Therefore, the barrier sensor 711 transmits the light of the backlight 703. If not detected, it is determined that the parallax barrier 702B is abnormal (for example, occurrence of a defect).
In addition, when the parallax barrier 702B is effective, the barrier sensor 711 operates to block the light of the backlight 703, and the backlight blocking layer 702S operates to block the light of the backlight 703. If the light is detected, it is determined that the parallax barrier 702B is abnormal (for example, occurrence of a defect).

Therefore, in this example, the parallax barrier 702B is abnormal (for example, if it is determined by comparing the valid / invalid signal of the parallax barrier 702B, the valid / invalid signal of the backlight blocking layer 702S, and the detection signal of the barrier sensor 711). It can be determined that a failure has occurred.
If it is determined that the parallax barrier 702B is abnormal, for example, the occurrence of a malfunction, the malfunction of the parallax barrier 702B is that the parallax barrier 702B is not switched to a normal valid state even when the parallax barrier 702B is effectively switched, and the light of the backlight 703 is blocked well. It is in a state that cannot be done. In this case, even if the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 is controlled to the 3D display state, the left-eye image and the left-eye image are not different from each other, and the image on the liquid crystal display 701 is not displayed in 3D.
In addition, it is conceivable that the parallax barrier 702B has a defect that even if the parallax barrier 702B is disabled, the image is not transparent and the image on the liquid crystal display 701 becomes dark even in 2D display.
The barrier sensor 711 and the backlight blocking layer 702S described above correspond to a barrier detection unit that detects a failure of validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702.

As described above, the barrier sensor 711 that detects the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier 702B is provided, and the backlight blocking layer 702S that operates in synchronization with the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier 702B is provided. The control microcomputer 311 compares the validity / invalidity signal of the parallax barrier 702B, the validity / invalidity signal of the backlight blocking layer 702S, and the detection signal of the barrier sensor 711 to determine whether the parallax barrier 702B is valid / invalid. It is determined whether or not there is a problem.
When the display device 741 displays 3D images, the barrier sensor 711 detects that the parallax barrier 702B is not valid (there is a problem and the normal valid state is not obtained even when the mode is switched to the valid mode). The control microcomputer 311 may control to switch the 3D display to the 2D display.
In this way, when the parallax barrier 702B is defective, it can be appropriately dealt with and the quality of the game can be prevented from being degraded.

Specific effects include the following.
Even if the parallax barrier 702B is not temporarily activated due to noise or the like, the game can be continued by switching the 3D display to the 2D display.
Even when the parallax barrier 702B cannot be operated effectively due to a failure of the switch liquid crystal 702, a game can be played in 2D display.
When the parallax barrier 702B malfunctions, instead of the 3D display effect, the 2D display effect is used, so that even a normal reach that does not normally hit can be hit (when 3D becomes a 2D display effect due to a defect and the normal reach increases) ), And the interest of the game is improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provided with a barrier detection means for detecting the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the barrier detection means detects a failure of the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal, the display state of the rendering means is switched to a state in which the parallax barrier is disabled and 2D display is performed.

Further, when 3D display is performed on the display device, if a defect of the parallax barrier 702B is detected a predetermined number of times by the barrier sensor 711, control may be performed so that the display is fixed in 2D display or the effect in 3D display is limited.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Provided with a barrier detection means for detecting the validity / invalidity of the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
When the barrier detection means detects a malfunction of the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal a predetermined number of times, the control for fixing the display state of the rendering means to the state where the parallax barrier is disabled and the 2D display is performed, or the parallax barrier is enabled A gaming machine that executes at least one of the controls for restricting the effect in the 3D display.

(2) Next, Modification 2 of the present invention will be described.
As described above, in the first embodiment, the configuration in which the 2D display is set even when the symbol is determined is set to be 2D display. A description will be given of a whole configuration to which a control of rendering in 2D display until the occurrence is made with reference to FIG. 118 as a second modification of the invention.
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an operation example of the effect from the start to the stop of the special figure.
In FIG. 118, the screen of the display unit 41a in the display device 41 is represented by symbols H1 to H5.
First, as shown on the screen H1, when the special figure at the start of the fluctuation is “1, 2, 3” and the display mode is 3D, “3D mode” is displayed at the top of the screen H1. ing. This makes it easy for the player to determine whether the current performance is in 2D mode or 3D mode. In addition, a display of (switching) is displayed in a lower part of the screen H1 so as to be surrounded by an ellipse, which indicates that the operation of the switching button 15 is in an effective state.

However, as described above, it is described that even in the 3D display mode, there is a case where 2D display or 3D display is controlled depending on the effect. As an example, 2D display from the start of fluctuation of the special drawing to reach and 3D display after reach are described.
Therefore, when the mode after switching by the switching button 15 is the 2D display mode, the switch liquid crystal 702 is immediately turned off to disable the parallax barrier 702B. However, in the 3D display mode, the switch liquid crystal 702 is immediately turned on. It also explains that it is not necessary to enable the parallax barrier 702B.
The effect screen shown in FIG. 118 is used when performing 2D display control by effect even in the 3D display mode. In particular, control is performed so that 2D display is performed from the start of fluctuation of the special figure to reach, and 3D display is performed after reach. It is an example.
In the screen H1, the white circle represents the special figure 1 hold display, and the black circle represents the special figure 2 hold display (the same applies to the other screens H2 to H5).

Now, as shown in the screen H1, when the special figure changes at the start of the state of “1, 2, 3” and the display mode is 3D, the display “3D mode” is displayed at the top of the screen H1. Is done. However, even in the 3D display mode, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 is configured to perform control for effecting in 2D display from the start of fluctuation of the special figure to the occurrence of reach, and therefore the parallax of the switch liquid crystal 703 The barrier 702B is controlled to an invalid state, and the effect is performed in 2D display on the screen H1. Therefore, the symbols “1, 2, 3” at the start of variation are displayed in 2D. This 2D display state continues from the start of fluctuation of the special drawing until the reach occurs.
In addition, when the reach does not occur from the start of the variation of the special figure and the variation stops with the off symbol, the effect is performed with the 2D display.

Next, as shown in screen H2, when the reach is established with the special figure variation of “3, changing, 3”, the player presses the switch button 15 to change the display mode to the 2D display mode when the reach changes. Unless otherwise, control is performed to maintain the 3D display mode until the symbol stop stage.
Therefore, when the reach variation occurs, the symbol “3, during variation 3” is displayed in 3D, and an effect is made such that the reach symbol appears three-dimensionally.
Next, as shown in the screen H3, when reaching the design stop stage through reach fluctuation, the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 703 is invalidally controlled by a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, and the design stop. Is performed in a 2D display, and the symbol is determined in a manner of deviation from “3, 2, 3” (the effect is also displayed in 2D). In this case, since the 3D display mode is selected when the reach changes, the 3D display mode is maintained even when the symbol is stopped. That is, unless the player presses the switching button 15 to change the display mode to the 2D display mode at the time of reach change, control is performed to maintain the 3D display mode even at the stage of symbol stoppage.
After that, the next symbol variation start is started, but at that time, the effect screen is as shown in the screen H1, and the display mode is controlled to maintain the 3D display mode.

On the other hand, when the player presses the switching button 15 at the stage of the screen H2 and switches the display mode from the 3D display mode to the 2D display mode when the reach is changed, the screen shifts from the screen H2 to the screen H4. At this time, the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 703 is controlled from valid to invalid by a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, and the effect of reach variation is switched from 3D display to 2D display effect.
However, in this case, although the 3D display was originally based on the occurrence of reach, the player switched to the 2D display mode for the convenience of the player. The control of applying the effect EF to the middle symbol of “3” is performed to notify the player that it is an alternative to the 3D display.
Next, as shown in the screen H5, when reaching the symbol stop stage through the reach fluctuation, the 2D display mode is maintained, the symbol stop effect is performed in 2D display, and the symbol is “3, 2, 3”. Confirm in the off mode (even when the symbol is confirmed, the effect is displayed in 2D). In this case, since the 2D display mode is already in effect when the reach changes, the display mode is maintained in the 2D display mode even when the symbol is stopped. That is, since the player presses the switching button 15 to change the display mode to the 2D display mode at the time of reach change, control is performed to maintain the 2D display mode even at the stage of symbol stop.
After that, the next symbol variation start is started. At that time, the effect screen is maintained while the 2D display mode is maintained, and the special symbol variation is started in the 2D display mode.

According to the second modification, the following effects are obtained.
In the variation display game at the time of reach variation, while producing the effect of 3D display, by disabling the parallax barrier 702B and making 2D display at the time of symbol determination, anyone can easily recognize the result of the variation display game it can.
Further, the player can surely recognize the confirmed symbol even when looking at the screen of the display device 41 only when the symbol is confirmed, and can easily confirm the hit / miss. As described above, 3D display has the following general problems.
・ 3D display gets tired when watching for a long time.
・ 3D display differs in how people see and get tired.
Therefore, in the configuration of the modification example 2, when the symbol is determined, even if the previous symbol variation is 3D display, it is displayed in 2D, so it is particularly effective when playing for a long time. It can cope with such general problems.
Further, since the effect is performed in 2D display from the start of the special figure change to the reach establishment, there is little fatigue even if the game is played for a long time.
Furthermore, since the player can switch to the 2D display even if the reach is changed by operating the switching button 15, it is convenient for the player to select how to see and how to get tired.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
A display state changing means for switching the parallax barrier between invalid and valid and controlling the parallax barrier to 2D display or 3D display;
From the start of the symbol change of the variation display game in the production means before the reach is established, the production is performed in 2D display,
When reach is achieved in symbol variation in the variation display game by the production means, the effect is performed by switching from 2D display to 3D display. When the symbol is determined as a result mode of the variation display game, even in 3D display, in 2D display A gaming machine that is controlled so as to produce

Next, the 1st another aspect of the said modification 2 is demonstrated.
In the second modification example, the 2D display is performed from the start of the special figure variation to the reach occurrence, and the 2D display is performed when the symbol is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation display game has a specific reach variation. Alternatively, when a low-speed fluctuation such as a frame advance of a symbol occurs, the configuration may be such that the effect is switched from 2D display to 3D display.
This is a first alternative of the second modification and will be described in detail here.
At the start of symbol variation, the switch liquid crystal 702 controls the parallax barrier 702B to be invalid based on a signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, whereby the special symbol variation symbol is displayed in 2D on the liquid crystal display 701. Will be produced. Thereafter, the same applies to normal fluctuations without reach. Next, when the reach variation occurs, the 2D display effect is continued in a general ordinary reach. After that, even if the reach is lost and the result of the symbol variation is lost, the symbol is determined in the same 2D display.

On the other hand, when a specific reach variation or a low-speed variation such as a frame advance of a symbol occurs, unlike the normal mode, a special production mode that increases the expectation of a big hit becomes a special production control device 300. The main control microcomputer 311 issues a switching instruction for switching the parallax barrier 702B from invalid to valid to the switch liquid crystal 702. As a result, the switch liquid crystal 702 switches the parallax barrier 702B from invalid to effective based on a switching instruction signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300. Therefore, the liquid crystal display 701 is switched to 3D display from the start timing of the next frame, and an effect by 3D display is performed. Thereafter, 3D display continues until an instruction to switch to the next parallax barrier 702B is issued.
Next, when the symbol variation stops and the symbol is finalized, the main control microcomputer 311 issues a switching instruction for switching the parallax barrier 702B from valid to invalid to the switch liquid crystal 702. Thereby, at the time of symbol determination, an effect is performed in 2D display. Even if the previous performance is performed in 3D display, the effect is fixed in 2D display when the symbol is determined.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
A display state changing means for switching the parallax barrier between invalid and valid and controlling the parallax barrier to 2D display or 3D display;
The display state changing means includes
When the variable display game by the production means is in the normal game state, the parallax barrier is invalidated to produce the 2D display,
When the variation display game by the production means becomes a specific reach variation or a low-speed variation such as frame advance of a symbol, the parallax barrier is enabled and the presentation is performed by switching from 2D display to 3D display. When a symbol is determined, a gaming machine is characterized in that, even in 3D display, control is performed so that a parallax barrier is disabled and an effect in 2D display is performed.

This has the following effects.
In a variation display game at the time of a specific reach variation or at a low speed variation such as frame advance of a symbol, a 3D display effect is produced, and when the symbol is fixed, the parallax barrier 702B is invalidated to make a 2D display. Anyone can easily recognize the result of the display game.
Also, in the production of low-speed fluctuations such as specific reach fluctuations or frame advance of symbols, unlike the normal mode, it becomes a special production mode that increases the expectation of big hits, so at that time the production screen By making 3D display, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

Next, a second alternative embodiment of the modification 2 will be described.
In the second modified example, when the 2D display or the 3D display is performed, the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 is basically controlled to be valid / invalid. In order to implement the second modification of the invention, a configuration in which the parallax barrier is not controlled may be employed.
Specifically, an effect of 2D display or 3D display is performed as follows.
-2D display from the start to reach of the special figure-3D display after the reach-2D display for the design stop effect-2D display when the symbol is finalized-Low speed fluctuation such as specific reach fluctuation or frame advance of the symbol In 3D display, in the second alternative mode, the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 is not controlled in the 2D / 3D display effect. That is, the parallax barrier 702B is configured to be always effective.
In the 2D display, the parallax barrier 702B is always effective, and for example, only the left-eye image is displayed on the screen to obtain a planar effect. On the other hand, in the 3D display, with the parallax barrier 702B being always effective, an effect in which the image for the left eye and the image for the right eye are alternately displayed is performed to obtain a stereoscopic effect.
Such a configuration of the second different mode has an advantage that the control related to the effect of 2D / 3D display is simple.

(3) Next, Modification 3 of the present invention will be described.
As described above, in the description of the first embodiment, it is stated that the probability variation symbol may be displayed in 3D and the normal symbol may be displayed in 2D when the hit is determined.
Therefore, this content will be described as a third modification of the invention with reference to FIG.
FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an operation example of the production from the start to the stop of the special figure.
In FIG. 119, the screen of the display unit 41a in the display device 41 is represented by reference numerals I1 to I3 and reference numerals J1 to J3.

<Series machine A: 1/2 pattern variation machine>
First, the type of series machine A will be described.
Conventionally, in gaming machines, a probability variation symbol is divided into a red color, a normal symbol is classified into a blue color, and the like, so that the probability variation after a big hit or the normal probability is distinguished.
Here, the probability variation symbol is a jackpot symbol when the jackpot probability fluctuates with high probability after the big hit, and the normal symbol is a jackpot symbol when the jackpot probability does not vary with high probability after the big hit. ,
And when the gaming machine is sold as a series of series products, the probability variation symbol is divided into red, and the normal symbol is divided into blue. For example, the numbers are as follows (numbers indicate symbol numbers): .
-Probability pattern (red): 1, 3, 5, 7, 9
・ Normal design (blue): 0, 2, 4, 6, 8
In this case, since the ratio between the probability variation symbol and the normal symbol is approximately ½, such a series of gaming machines is referred to as “series machine A: 1/2 symbol probability variation machine” for convenience.
Note that, in comparison with “series machine B: all symbol probability changing machine (number of times cut)” described later, probability variation continues (maintains a high probability state) in the case of probability variation symbols until the next big hit occurs. Further, the normal symbol is in a low probability state until the next jackpot occurs (whether or not the probability changes thereafter depends on the jackpot symbol).

First, in the third modification shown in FIG. 119, there is no switching button 15 operated by the player. Therefore, the display mode (2D or 3D) in the effect screen is basically the 3D mode.
Now, as shown in the screen I1, when the special figure at the start of the fluctuation is a 3D display symbol such as “1, 2, 3”, the game is started from this, and the fluctuation display is performed from the special figure fluctuation to the reach establishment, etc. The game is played, and the game result is eventually lost or a big hit.
In the screen I1, a white circle represents a special figure 1 hold display, and a black circle represents a special figure 2 hold display (the same applies to other screens).

Then, as shown in the screen I2, when the special figure variation stops and a big hit is generated with a symbol "3, 3, 3", for example, the symbol "3" corresponds to a probability variation symbol, so the display mode is 3D. The design is confirmed in the state maintained. At this time, in detail, when reaching the stage of symbol stop after the reach fluctuation, the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 703 is effectively controlled by the signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 (if it is effective before that, it is effective) The symbol stop effect is performed in 3D display, and the symbol is determined in the big hit mode of “3, 3, 3” (the effect is also displayed in 3D).
On the other hand, when the big hit stop mode is a normal symbol, as shown in the screen I3, when reaching the symbol stop stage through the reach fluctuation, the signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 is used to switch the switch liquid crystal 703. The parallax barrier 702B is controlled to be invalid, the symbol stop effect is performed in 2D display, and the symbol is determined in the big hit stop mode with the normal symbol of “2, 2, 2” (the effect is also displayed in 2D) ).

According to the modified example 3, the following effects are obtained.
A normal symbol is displayed in 2D when the jackpot symbol is confirmed, and a probability variation symbol is displayed in 3D when the jackpot symbol is confirmed, so that the player can easily distinguish between the normal symbol and the probability variation symbol, so each symbol data of the normal symbol and the probability variation symbol Can be made common.
Further, since the 3D symbol data can be used for 2D, the symbol data does not increase even if both the 2D and 3D symbols can be displayed.
When the 3D symbol data is used for 2D, only the left-eye image data in the 3D symbol data is used as the left-eye image data for 2D display, and the left-eye image data is displayed in 2D. By using it as image data for the right eye for, as long as there is 3D symbol data, it can be diverted to image data for 2D display and there is no increase in symbol data.
By the way, in the past, the probability variation design is distinguished by red color, the normal design is distinguished by blue color, etc. When the "All symbol probability variation type" and "1/2 symbol probability variation type" are prepared on the series machine, the same symbol is red and red color. Since it was necessary to create two types of blue, the design data increased.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
A display state changing means for switching the parallax barrier between invalid and valid to control to 2D display or 3D display;
Design data setting means for setting symbol data including a normal symbol and a probability variation symbol corresponding to the effect content of the effect means,
The production control device
A game machine characterized in that a normal symbol is controlled to be displayed in 2D when the symbol is confirmed, and a probability variation symbol is controlled so as to produce a 3D display when the symbol is confirmed. In addition, when defining a symbol, the inventive concept of the above configuration is as follows: It is expressed as
The normal symbol is
It is a jackpot symbol that does not accompany the probability fluctuation that the jackpot probability becomes high after the jackpot occurrence,
The probability variation pattern is
A gaming machine characterized by a jackpot symbol with a probability variation in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot has occurred.
Further, when the symbol data is shared, the inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The design data setting means
A gaming machine characterized in that symbol data is commonly set in the same data format without distinguishing between normal symbols and probability variation symbols in 2D display and 3D display.

<Series machine B: All symbol probable machines (cutting times)>
Next, the type of series machine B will be described.
“Series machine B: all symbol probability changing machine (number of times cut)” is a case where all symbols are probability changing symbols, for example, as follows (numbers indicate symbol numbers).
-Probability variation (3D display): 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
In this case, since the ratio of the probability variation symbol is 100%, such a series of gaming machines is referred to as “series machine B: all symbol probability variation machine” for convenience.
However, the probability variation does not always continue until the next big hit occurs (maintains a high probability state), but the probability variation continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 75 times) after the big hit ends. When the value exceeds, the normal probability is restored (corresponding to cutting the number of times). If it returns to normal probability, it will be in a low probability state.
Therefore, a gaming machine having such a specification is referred to as an all symbol probability changing machine (number of times cut). Note that the gaming machine that performs the count cut may be referred to as an ST machine, for example.

Next, a production example of “series machine B: all symbol probability changing machine (number of times cut)” will be described.
Now, as shown in the screen J1, when the special figure at the start of the fluctuation is a 3D display symbol such as “1, 2, 3”, the game is started from here, and the fluctuation display is performed from the special figure fluctuation to the reach establishment, etc. The game is played, and the game result is eventually lost or a big hit.

Then, as shown in the screen J2, when the special figure fluctuation is stopped and a big hit is generated with the symbol "3, 3, 3", for example, the symbol "3" corresponds to the probability variation symbol, so the display mode is 3D. The design is confirmed in the state maintained. At this time, in detail, when reaching the stage of symbol stop after the reach fluctuation, the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 703 is effectively controlled by the signal from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 (if it is effective before that, it is effective) The symbol stop effect is performed in 3D display, and the symbol is determined in the big hit mode of “3, 3, 3” (the effect is also displayed in 3D).
On the other hand, when the big hit stop mode is “2, 2, 2”, as shown in the screen J3, the symbol “2” also corresponds to the probability variation symbol, so the display mode is maintained in 3D. The symbol is fixed.
Therefore, even if the symbol is “3, 3, 3” or “2, 2, 2”, any symbol will be a probable big hit, so the big hit stop mode is performed in 3D display and the symbol is confirmed. Even at that time, the effect is a 3D display.
After the big hit, the probability fluctuation continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 75 times), and when the predetermined number of times is exceeded, the normal probability is restored. That is, the number of probability fluctuations is cut.

According to the modified example 3, the following effects are obtained.
Since the big hit stop mode becomes 3D display for all symbols, it is possible to give the player the real pleasure of 3D performance.
In particular, since the so-called “series machine B: all symbol probability changing machine (number of times cut)” type gaming machine, after the big hit, the probability fluctuation is cut at a predetermined number of times. The more you play, the more fun you can play.

(4) Next, Modification 4 of the present invention will be described.
In the first embodiment, a shutter accessory mechanism (for example, the shutter accessory mechanism 801) that shields the entire front side of the display device 41 is provided. Instead of such a shutter accessory mechanism, the display device 41 is provided. You may make it the structure which produces the effect which displays a sandstorm screen on this screen.
For example, the sandstorm screen has a special effect such that a sandstorm is blown over the entire screen of the display device 41 immediately before switching from 2D display to 3D display.
By displaying such a sandstorm screen, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the screen of the display device 41 and to make the switching of the parallax barrier 702B inconspicuous.
Further, such a configuration has an advantage that a mechanism such as a shutter accessory mechanism is unnecessary. Therefore, control is easy and the cost is reduced in that a mechanism is unnecessary.

(5) Next, Modification 5 of the present invention will be described.
In the first embodiment, the control for switching the parallax barrier 702B to valid / invalid is performed by the control of the switch liquid crystal 702 in the display device 41. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control for switching the parallax barrier 702B to valid / invalid is not performed. It may be configured.
The configuration in which the control for switching the parallax barrier 702B between valid / invalid is not performed is, for example, a configuration in which the parallax barrier 702B is always valid (for example, a configuration in which a parallax barrier is physically present without using a switch liquid crystal).
When 2D display is performed, a 2D image (for example, only the image for the left eye) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 701, so that a 2D display effect is performed on the screen of the display device 42. On the other hand, when switching from 2D display to 3D display, 3D display effects are displayed on the screen of the display device 42 by displaying 3D images (left-eye image and right-eye image) on the liquid crystal display 701. .
Even in the configuration of the modification example 5 as described above, the shutter accessory mechanism has an effect of allowing the player to pay attention to the screen of the display device 41 and eliminating the uncomfortable feeling when switching from 2D display to 3D display. .

(4) Next, Modification 6 of the present invention will be described.
As described above, when setting the image data for 2D display in the description of the first embodiment, the image data for the left eye for 3D display is set to the position for the left eye of the 2D display and the image data for 2D display is set. A configuration is described in which image data for the left eye is created, and then the image data for the right eye for 2D display is created by shifting the image data for the left eye set for 2D display to the position for the right eye.
For example, when setting image data for 2D display, image data for 2D display may be created with reference to image data for the right eye for 3D display.
In this case, specifically, when setting image data for 2D display, the right-eye image data for 3D display is set to the right-eye position for 2D display, and right-eye image data for 2D display is created. Then, the image data for the right eye set for 2D display is shifted to the position for the left eye to create image data for the left eye for 2D display.

Here, the inventive concept of the above configuration when creating image data for 2D display with reference to image data for the left eye for 3D display is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that controls an effect capable of producing 2D display and 3D display,
The rendering means includes a parallax barrier, and the parallax barrier is configured to be switchable between valid and invalid with a switch liquid crystal,
The production control device
A display state changing means for switching the parallax barrier between invalid and valid to control to 2D display or 3D display;
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the effect content of the effect means,
The image data setting means includes
Set left-eye image data and right-eye image data for 3D display,
A gaming machine comprising: setting image data for left eye for 2D display, and then setting image data for right eye by displacing the image data for left eye by a predetermined amount.
The inventive concept for creating 2D display image data with reference to 3D display image data is expressed as follows.
The image data setting means includes
Setting left-eye image data for 2D display with reference to left-eye image data for 3D display,
A gaming machine, wherein left-eye image data set for 2D display is displaced by a predetermined amount to set right-eye image data.
It should be noted that the invention concept for creating 2D display image data on the basis of 3D display right eye image data may be reversed in the description of the left eye and right eye in the above invention concept.
In addition, when expressing the inventive concept positioned above these, the description for the left eye and the right eye may be expressed as one eye and the other eye.

Next, the inventive concept of the configuration for shifting the left-eye screen data to the position of the right-eye screen data is expressed as follows.
The image data setting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein after setting left-eye image data for 2D display, the left-eye screen data is shifted to the position of the right-eye screen data by one pixel of the image to set the right-eye screen data.

According to the modified example 6, there are the following effects.
(1) At the time of 2D display, the parallax barrier 702B of the switch liquid crystal 702 is controlled to be invalid and transparently operated, so that it becomes the same as the state without the parallax barrier 702B, and can look exactly the same as the normal 2D display. .
(2) When creating image data for 2D display, left-eye image data for 2D display is set based on left-eye image data for 3D display, and then, instead of right-eye image data for 2D display In addition, since it is only necessary to shift the image data for the left eye to the position of the data for the right eye, conversion processing for converting the data for 3D display into that for 2D display becomes unnecessary, which reduces costs and increases the efficiency of development and manufacturing. Can be planned.

(3) The configuration of Modification 6 is particularly effective when using a VDP such as an amusement graphic chip.
The background will be explained.
VDPs used in gaming machines can be broadly classified into “things with excellent 2D drawing ability” and “things with excellent 3D drawing ability”.
The former VDP, which has excellent 2D drawing ability, has a drawing function for both 2D images and 3D images, but the drawing ability of 2D images is better.
On the other hand, the latter VDP, which has excellent 3D rendering capability, creates a model with a combination of polyhedrons called polygons, not the 3D display that pops out in the present invention, and creates a so-called texture (image data) on the model surface 3D is drawn by a pasting method. In particular, it is possible to add movement to an image or to deform the image by calculation.
For example, there are many types of commercially available game machines.
In comparison with the latter, the former VDP, which is excellent in 2D drawing capability, basically displays a 2D image in a superimposed manner or displays a 2D moving image. Therefore, the left-eye image can be easily displayed while being shifted to the right-eye position.
On the other hand, with the latter VDP having excellent 3D rendering capability, it can be said that it is easier to convert 3D data into 2D by calculation.
From such a viewpoint, it is preferable to apply the modified example 6 to the former using the VDP having excellent 2D drawing ability, and the effect is more effectively exhibited.

(7) The above-described embodiment of the present invention is an example in which the operations of video, audio, decoration, and accessory are controlled by a single effect control board. A configuration may be adopted, or a configuration in which a plurality of CPUs are mounted on the same substrate and shared control may be performed.
By doing so, the processing speed increases as the processing load on each CPU is reduced. In addition, the program size of each CPU can be reduced.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 Front frame 5 Glass frame 9 Production buttons 12a, 12b Speaker (sound reporting device)
15 change button 20 game board 25 1st start prize opening 26 2nd start prize opening 2 (ordinary electric accessory: ordinary electric power) (ordinary variable prize winning device)
27 Variable prize-winning device (Special variable prize-winning device)
32 General drawing start gate 35 Collective display device 41 Display device (special drawing display device) (normal symbol variable display device) (production means)
46 effect button switch 48 changeover switch 54 card unit connection board 55 external information terminal board 81 frame illumination unit 82 panel surface outer periphery illumination unit 83 center case illumination unit 84 display area peripheral illumination unit 100 game control device 101 game microcomputer (game calculation processing) apparatus)
101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 First Start Port Switch 121 Second Start Port Switch 122 Gate Switch 123 Winner Port Switch 124 Count Switch 125 Magnetic Sensor Switch 126 Vibration Sensor Switch 140 Management Device 200 Discharge Control Device 201 Discharge Microcomputer 211 Glass Frame Opening Detection Switch 212 Front Frame Opening detection switch 213 Overflow switch 214 Radio wave detection sensor 215 Dispensing ball detection switch 216 Shooting ball break switch 300 Production control device (display state changing means, switching button valid display means, production button valid display means)
311 Main control microcomputer (1stCPU)
311a RAM
312 VDP
322 Image ROM
360 wireless module 371 setting switch 500 power supply device 551 card unit 701 liquid crystal display 702 switch liquid crystal 702B parallax barrier 703 backlight 801, 802, 803 shutter function mechanism (shielding means)

Claims (2)

Production control means for performing production by controlling production means capable of producing 2D display and 3D display;
Switching operation means capable of switching to 2D display or 3D display;
Production operation means capable of being involved in a predetermined range in the production in the production means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The production control means includes
Comprising display state changing means for controlling the effect means to 2D display or 3D display;
The display state changing means includes
The display state of the effect means can be switched based on the operation of the switching operation means,
The production control means includes
After the switching operation means is operated, the first predetermined period is invalid operation of the switching operation unit, the first of the second predetermined time period different from the predetermined duration of operation of said staging operation means Invalid,
A gaming machine, wherein after the production operation means is operated, the operation of the switching operation means is invalidated for a third predetermined period, and the operation of the production operation means is not invalidated. The production control means includes
After the switching operation means is operated, the operation of the switching operation means is invalidated for the first predetermined period ,
After the production operation means is operated, the operation of the switching operation means is invalidated for the third predetermined period ,
The first predetermined period is longer than the third predetermined period ;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the operation of the effect operation means is not invalidated even in the third predetermined period .

Images